CR Series

Compact Router

User’s Guide

Miranda Technologies Inc.

3499 Douglas B. Floreani
Montreal, Quebec
Canada H4S 2C6
CR Series Compact Router — User’s Guide
• Revision: 2.3
• Software Version: 1.5.0
• Part Number: UG1600-10
• Copyright: © 2010 Miranda Technologies. All rights reserved.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form by photocopy, microfilm, xerography or
any other means, or incorporated into any information retrieval system, electronic or mechani-
cal, without the written permission of Miranda Technologies, Inc.
• The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice or obligation.
• All title and copyrights as well as trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in and to the
Software Product (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, test, and “applets” incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the Software Product, are owned by Miranda Technologies,
Inc. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Customer shall not copy the printed materials accompanying the software product.

Notice
The software contains proprietary information of Miranda Technologies, Inc. It is provided under a
license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and is also protected by copyright
law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited.
Due to continued product development, the accuracy of the information in this document may
change without notice. The information and intellectual property contained herein is confidential
between Miranda and the client and remains the exclusive property of Miranda. If you find any
problems in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. Miranda does not warrant that
this document is error-free.

FCC Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Declaration of Conformance (CE)

All of the equipment described in this manual has been designed to conform with the required
safety and emissions standards of the European Community. Products tested and verified to meet
these standards are marked as required by law with the CE mark. (See Symbols and Their Mean-
ings on page v.)

ii Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 When shipped into member countries of the European Community, this equipment is accompanied
by authentic copies of original Declarations of Conformance on file in Miranda GVD offices in
Grass Valley, California USA.

Trademarks
Miranda is a registered trademark of Miranda Technologies, Inc.
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered trademarks or
copyrights of their respective holders. All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve
as comments or examples and are not to be understood as advertising for the products or their man-
ufactures.

Software License Agreement and Warranty Information

Contact Miranda for details on the software license agreement and product warranty.

Technical Support Contact Information

Miranda has made every effort to ensure that the equipment you receive is in perfect working order
and that the equipment fits your needs. In the event that problems arise that you cannot resolve, or
if there are any questions regarding this equipment or information about other products manufac-
tured by Miranda, please contact your local representative or contact Miranda directly through one
of the appropriate means listed here.
• Main telephone: 530-265-1000 (9 am to 9 pm PST)
Fax: 530-265-1021
In the Americas, call toll-free: +1-800-224-7882 (9 am to 9 pm EST)
In Europe, the Middle East, African or the UK, call +44 (0) 1491 820222 (9 am to 6 pm, GMT)
In France, call +33 1 55 86 87 88 (9 am to 5 pm, GMT + 1)
In Asia, call +852-2539-6987 (9 am to 5 pm, GMT + 8)
In China, call +86-10-5873-1814
• Emergency after hours: toll-free: +1-800-224-7882
Tel: +1-514-333-1772
• E-Mail:
In the Americas, support@[Link]
In Europe, the Middle East, African or the UK, eurotech@[Link]
In France, eurotech@[Link]
In Asia, asiatech@[Link]
In China, asiatech@[Link]
• Website: [Link]
• Mail Shipping
Miranda GVD Miranda GVD
P.O. Box 1658 125 Crown Point Court
Nevada City, CA 95959, USA Grass Valley, CA 95945, USA

Note Return Material Authorization (RMA) required for all returns.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide iii

Change History
The table below lists the changes to the Compact Router User’s Guide.
• User’s Guide Part # UG1600-10
• Software version: 1.5.0

Rev # Date ECO # Description Approved By

1.0 03 Apr 06 — Initial Release —
1.1 14 Nov 06 12390 Added material regarding -AES routers, 32×32 routers, D. Cox
network operation, 16×4 router, and 16×4 and 16×2
control panels. Corrected a few problems.
1.2 04 Jan 07 12440 Added material regarding -AV routers, remote panel D. Cox
modules, CRConfig (software), and compact router
networks.
Created button legend templates.
1.3 12 Jul 07 13355 Added material regarding analog audio routers, D. Cox
machine control routers, and “3Gig” routers.
Automation is now possible.
1.4 19 Nov 08 14426 References the CRSC software. Includes new CR D. Cox
Series products. Misc. corrections.
1.5 30 Mar 09 15703 Format change. D. Cox
1.6 12 Oct 09 16114 Added new CR Series products, NV9000 support. D. Cox
2.0 22 Mar 10 16912 Added CQX series. D. Cox
2.1 04 May 10 16993 Added ± 3-line buffer. D. Cox
2.2 18 Aug 10 17186 Short addition regarding 3-line buffer. D. Cox
2.3 05 Nov 10 17286 Added 3Gig routers D. Cox

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)

Miranda is in compliance with EU Directive RoHS 2002/95/EC governing the restricted use of cer-
tain hazardous substances and materials in products and in our manufacturing processes.
Miranda has a substantial program in place for RoHS compliance that includes significant invest-
ment in our manufacturing process, and a migration of Miranda product electronic components and
structural materials to RoHS compliance.
It is our objective at NV to maintain compliance with all relevant environmental and product regu-
latory requirements. Detailed information on specific products or on the RoHS program at Miranda
is available from Miranda Customer Support at
1-800-719-1900 (toll-free) or
1-530-265-1000 (outside the U.S.).

iv Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

Important Safeguards and Notices
This section provides important safety guidelines for operators and service personnel. Specific
warnings and cautions appear throughout the manual where they apply. Please read and follow this
important information, especially those instructions related to the risk of electric shock or injury to
persons.

Warning Any instructions in this manual that require opening the equipment cover or
enclosure are for use by qualified service personnel only. To reduce the risk of
electric shock, do not perform any service other than that contained in the operat-
ing instructions unless you are qualified to do so.

Symbols and Their Meanings

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle alerts the user to the pres-
ence of dangerous voltages within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle alerts the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance/service instructions.

The Ground symbol represents a protective grounding terminal. Such a terminal must be connected
to earth ground prior to making any other connections to the equipment.

The fuse symbol indicates that the fuse referenced in the text must be replaced with one having the
ratings indicated.

The presence of this symbol in or on Miranda equipment means that it has been designed, tested
and certified as complying with applicable Underwriter’s Laboratory (USA) regulations and rec-
ommendations.

The presence of this symbol in or on Miranda equipment means that it has been designed, tested
and certified as essentially complying with all applicable European Union (CE) regulations and
recommendations.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide v

 General Warnings
A warning indicates a possible hazard to personnel which may cause injury or death. Observe the
following general warnings when using or working on this equipment:
• Heed all warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions.
• Do not use this equipment in or near water.
• This equipment is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid elec-
trical shock, plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting the equip-
ment inputs or outputs.
• Route power cords and other cables so they are not likely to be damaged.
• Disconnect power before cleaning the equipment. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners; use
only a damp cloth.
• Dangerous voltages may exist at several points in this equipment. To avoid injury, do not touch
exposed connections and components while power is on.
• Do not wear rings or wristwatches when troubleshooting high current circuits such as the power
supplies.
• To avoid fire hazard, use only the specified fuse(s) with the correct type number, voltage and
current ratings as referenced in the appropriate locations in the service instructions or on the
equipment. Always refer fuse replacements to qualified service personnel.
• To avoid explosion, do not operate this equipment in an explosive atmosphere.
• Have qualified service personnel perform safety checks after any service.

General Cautions
A caution indicates a possible hazard to equipment that could result in equipment damage. Observe
the following cautions when operating or working on this equipment:
• When installing this equipment, do not attach the power cord to building surfaces.
• To prevent damage to equipment when replacing fuses, locate and correct the problem that
caused the fuse to blow before re-applying power.
• Use only the specified replacement parts.
• Follow static precautions at all times when handling this equipment.
• This product should only be powered as described in the manual. To prevent equipment dam-
age, select the proper line voltage on the power supply(ies) as described in the installation doc-
umentation.
• To prevent damage to the equipment, read the instructions in the equipment manual for proper
input voltage range selection.
• Some products include a backup battery. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by
a battery of an incorrect type. Dispose of batteries according to instructions.
• Products that have (1) no on/off switch and (2) use an external power supply must be installed
in proximity to a main power output that is easily accessible.

vi Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The PDF Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Chapter 2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Digital Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CQX Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Analog Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Digital Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Analog Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Machine Control Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The Control Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1RU Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CQX Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2RU Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
The Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1RU Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2RU Routers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Stand-Alone Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Characteristics of Panels in CRSC Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Characteristics Common to Both Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1RU Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CQX Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2RU Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1RU Remote Panel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2RU Remote Panel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide vii

Table of Contents

Chapter 3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Stand-Alone Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CRSC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Router Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installing CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Creating a Router Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Stand-Alone Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
CRSC Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Levels and IP Addresses in CRSC Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CQX Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Mode Rotary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Frame ID Rotary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Levels and IP Addresses in NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Setting Up Your Configuration PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Multiple Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Stand-Alone Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Further Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CRSC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Simple Testing with CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Further Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Bypass Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
GPIO Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using CRSC for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
NV9000 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Simple Testing with CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Simple Testing under NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Chapter 4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Stand-Alone Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Stand-Alone Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
IP Addresses and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
CRSC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
IP Addresses and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Router Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Router Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Virtual Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

viii Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 Table of Contents

Panel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Chapter 5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Stand-Alone Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Machine Control Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Machine Control Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CRSC Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Router Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
CQX Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Chapter 6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Power Supply LED Does Not Illuminate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Noisy Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Router Functioning Improperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Network Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
CRSC Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Chapter 7 Technical Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reference Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Serial Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
DB25 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Analog Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide ix

Table of Contents

GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Video Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CQX Routers and Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Default Router State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Default Remote Panel Module State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Initial Control Panel State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Control Panel Configuration in NV9000-SE Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CQX Transition Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 8 Misc. Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
NV9000 Network Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
NV9000 Router Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configuration Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Lock, Protect, and Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
NV915 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Configuration Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Operational Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
AES Routers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Loss of Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Analog Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Machine Control Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Power Cord Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

x Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

1. Preface

Chapter 1 is an introduction to the User’s Guide. It presents the following topics:

• Chapter Structure
• The PDF Document
• Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations

Chapter Structure
The following chapters provide detailed instructions for all aspects of Compact Router operations:
• Chapter 1, Preface, (this chapter) outlines easy ways to use this guide and provides a list of
terms and conventions.
• Chapter 2, Introduction, provides a functional description of the products.
• Chapter 3, Installation, provides installation and connection instructions.
• Chapter 4, Configuration, provides configuration instructions.
• Chapter 5, Operation, provides operating instructions.
• Chapter 6, Maintenance, provides maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions.
• Chapter 7, Technical Details, provides electrical, video, audio, mechanical, and environmental
specifications, product drawings, and default settings.
• Chapter 8, Misc. Topics, presents a glossary, miscellaneous instructions and information, and a
brief discussion of NV9000 router control systems.
• An Index is also provided for your reference.

The PDF Document

This guide is provided in PDF format, allowing you to use Acrobat’s “bookmarks” to navigate to
any desired location. You can also easily print a hardcopy. Please note:
• Use the Table of Contents or the bookmarks page to jump to any desired section.
• Many hyperlinks are provided within the chapters.
• Use the Index to jump to specific topics within a chapter. Each page number in the index is a
hyperlink.
• Use Acrobat’s ‘Go to Previous View’ and ‘Go to Next View’ buttons to retrace your complete
navigational path.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 1

1. Preface
Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations

• Use the ‘First Page’, ‘Previous Page’, and ‘Next Page’, and ‘Last Page’ buttons to go to the
first, previous, next, or last page within a PDF file.

Note To display the navigation buttons, right-click the Tool Bar area, and check
‘Navigation’.

• Use Acrobat’s extensive search capabilities, such as the ‘Find’ tool and ‘Search’ tool to perform
comprehensive searches as required.

Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations

The following conventions are used throughout this guide:
• The symbol S denotes either an example or a special message.
• Entries written in bold-face or Capital Letters denote physical control panel buttons, GUI but-
tons, or menu items.
• Click Apply to ...
• Press the SRC 12 button ...
• Button names, menu names, and certain other names are enclosed in single quotation marks.
Double quotation marks enclose informal or colloquial expressions.
The following terms and abbreviations are used throughout this guide:
• The term “control panel” refers to the CR Series control panels (such as the CP3232), and to
NV96xx control panels.
• The term “router” refers to any CR Series compact router, with or without its control panel. If a
distinction is required, it will be made.
• The term “remote panel module” refers to the CR Series RP16 and RP32. The legend on each
of those products is “Remote Panel Module.” The remote panel modules are also called remote
panel expansion kits in the sales literature.
• The term “remote panel” refers to a control panel mounted on a remote panel module.
• The term “captive panel” refers to a control panel mounted on a router. They are not config-
urable and do not have the capabilities of remote panels, but are useful for some purposes.
• The term “frame” refers to any CR Series router or remote panel module.
• “High tally” means that a button is brightly illuminated.
• “Low tally” means that a button is illuminated at low intensity. Most buttons assume a low tally
state until selected.
• The terms “machine control router” and “port router” have the same meaning.
• The term “3Gig” describes Miranda devices capable of operating at HD rates and also at
2.97 Gb/s or 2.966 Gb/s1.
• The term CRSC refers to configuration software, the Compact Router System Configurator.
• The term CRConfig refers to obsolete configuration software.
• The term “CQX” represents the “clean and quiet” compact routers and panels.

1. 2.97 / 1.001

2 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

2. Introduction
Chapter 2 provides a functional description of the products. It presents these topics:
• Overview
• Features

Overview
Summary
CR Series products include 1RU and 2RU routers, control panels, and “remote panel modules.”
The CR Series includes video and audio routers in several formats, and machine control routers.
These are the 1RU compact routers and matching control panels:

1RU Routers Corresponding 1RU Control Panel

CR0808-3Gig 8×8, “3Gig” digital video CP0808 8×8, with 6 function
CR0808-HD 8×8, high definition digital video buttons
CR0808-SD 8×8, standard definition digital video
CR0808-AES 8×8, AES3id digital audio
CR0808-HD-NR 8×8, HD video, non-reclocking
CR0808-SD-NR 8×8, SD video, non-reclocking
CR0808-AA 8×8, analog audio
CR0808-AV 8×8, analog video
CR1616-3Gig 16×16, “3Gig” digital video CP1616 16×16, with 6 function
CR1616-HD 16×16, high definition digital video buttons
CR1616-SD 16×16, standard definition digital video
CR1616-AES 16×16, AES3id digital audio
CR16-PR 16-port machine control
CR1616-HD-NR 16×16, HD video, non-reclocking
CR1616-SD-NR 16×16, SD video, non-reclocking
CR1616-AA 16×16, analog audio
CR1616-AV 16×16, analog video
CR1604-3Gig 16×4, “3Gig” digital video CP1604 16×4, with 6 function
CR1604-HD 16×4, high definition digital video CP1602 buttons
CR1604-SD 16×4, standard definition digital video 16×2, with 6 function
CR1604-AES 16×4, AES3id digital audio buttons
CR1604-HD-NR 16×4, HD video, non-reclocking
CR1604-SD-NR 16×4, SD video, non-reclocking
CR1604-AA 16×4, analog audio
CR1604-AV 16×4, analog video
CR1602-3Gig-CQX 16×2, “3Gig” digital video CP1602-CQX 16 × (2 + 6), with 4
CR1602-HD-CQX 16×2, high definition digital video transition type buttons, 3
CR1602-SD-CQX 16×2, standard definition digital video transition rate buttons,
and 7 function buttons (5
undefined).

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 3

2. Introduction
Overview

These are the 2RU compact routers and matching control panels:

2RU Routers Corresponding 2RU Control Panel

CR3232-3Gig 32×32, “3Gig” digital video CP3232 32×32, with 12 function buttons
CR3232-HD 32×32, high definition digital video
CR3232-SD 32×32, standard definition digital video
CR3232-AES 32×32, AES3id digital audio
CR32-PR 32-port machine control
CR3232-HD-NR 32×32, HD video, non-reclocking
CR3232-SD-NR 32×32, SD video, non-reclocking
CR3232-AA 32×32, analog audio
CR3232-AV 32×32, analog video
CR3204-3Gig 32×4, “3Gig” digital video CP3204 32×4, with 12 function buttons
CR3204-HD 32×4, high definition digital video
CR3204-SD 32×4, standard definition digital video
CR3204-AES 32×4, AES3id digital audio
CR3204-HD-NR 32×4, HD video, non-reclocking
CR3204-SD-NR 32×4, SD video, non-reclocking
CR3204-AA 32×4, analog audio
CR3204-AV 32×4, analog video

The CP3201 (a 1 RU panel) is special case not listed in the tables above: it controls 32 sources and
1 destination. It does not “correspond” to any router and is used only in a CRSC Network. (See
page 61.)

Remote Panel Modules Corresponding Control Panel

RP16 1RU CP1616, CP1604, 16×16, 16×4, 16×2, with 6 function buttons.
CP1602, CP3201 (The CP3201 is a 1RU panel.)
RP32 2RU CP3232, CP3204 32×32, 32×4 with 12 function buttons.

Routers
The 16×16 routers can switch any of 16 inputs to any of 16 outputs and the 32×32 routers can
switch any of 32 inputs to any of 32 outputs. The 8×8 routers switch 8 inputs to 8 outputs. The
16×4 routers switch 16 inputs to 4 outputs. The 32×4 routers switch 32 inputs to 4 outputs.
With the exception of the machine control routers (CR16-PR and CR32-PR), all the compact rout-
ers are X/Y routers having n × m crosspoint matrices. An input can be routed to any or all of the
outputs.
The machine control routers (also called port routers) are point-to-point routers. An input can be
connected to at most one output. (The connections are RS-422 and bidirectional, typically with
commands in one direction and responses in the other direction.)
Each of the 3 “clean and quiet” (CQX) router models routes 16 inputs to 2 “clean and quiet” out-
puts or to 6 auxiliary (normal) outputs. For the clean and quiet outputs, the router performs smooth
transitions. The transitions are governed by transition type and transition rate, selectable on the
CP1602-CQX control panel. The CQX routers also provide 2 bypass inputs. The 2 clean and quiet
outputs switch to the bypass inputs if the router loses power. There are no 2RU clean and quiet
routers at present. The CQX routers also provide a GPIO connector, supporting 16 inputs and 4 out-
puts. The inputs each select one of the video inputs for CQ output 1 and the outputs signal alarms
and status. See GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers on page 95 for details.

4 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

Control Panels
A CR Series control panel mounts on the front of a router or on the front of a remote panel module
and provides direct visual and tactile control of the router or routers connected to the remote panel
module. (You can install or uninstall one easily in a few seconds.) However, any of the routers can
also operate without a control panel, under network control or through automation.
The CP3201 is special case: it is a 1 RU panel that controls 32 sources and 1 destination. It does not
mount on the front of a router and is used only in a CRSC Network. (See page 61.)
The CP1602-CQX is also a special case: it is a 1RU control panel used in conjunction with any of
the CQX routers. This panel has 16 source buttons, 2 “clean and quiet” destination buttons, 6 auxil-
iary destination buttons, 4 transition type buttons, 3 transition rate buttons, and 7 function buttons
(5 undefined).

Remote Panel Modules

A “remote panel module” is a device that sends control messages to a network of routers (and
receives status messages from the routers in the network). A remote panel module receives take and
lock commands from an attached control panel and must have a control panel attached to be useful.
We say the panel module is “remote” because it and its control panel can be located apart from the
routers (from a few inches to several hundred meters, subject to cable limitations).
A remote panel module can be configured to operate (with its mounted control panel) as either (1) a
CRSC remote panel or (2) an NV9000 panel in a system controlled by an NV9000 or NV915 router
control system.
When it is set up for use as a CRSC panel, it is configured in CRSC. When it is set up for use as an
NV9000 panel, it must be configured in NV9000-SE Utilities.
S CRSC is the Compact Router System Configurator. See CRSC on page 36 for information.
S Please also refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide (or the NV9000-SE Utilities help sys-
tem).

Usage
There are several different ways to use compact routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 or NV915 router control system.
• A single stand-alone CQX router with a “captive” CQX control panel or with automation.
• A CQX router with a remote CQX control panel.
S A captive panel is one attached directly to a router. A remote panel is one mounted on a remote
panel module.
S Automation is up to the customer.
Routers and remote panel modules come from the factory ready for stand-alone operation. They
must be configured for use either in a CRSC network or in an NV9000 network. Once configured,
they must be reset to work in stand-alone mode.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 5

2. Introduction
Overview

A remote panel module must be configured to work either in a CRSC network or in an NV9000
network. The two configuration modes are not compatible.
Figure 2-1 compares a stand-alone router with a captive panel to a stand-alone router network with
remote panel modules:
Remote Panel 1

Standalone Router and Remote Panel 2

“Captive” Control Panel

Networked Routers with

Remote Panels
Ethernet Switch

Router 1
PC

Router 2

Router 3

Router 4

Figure 2-1. Standalone Router vs. a Network of Routers

A CRSC network has the same topology as a stand-alone network, except (1) the routers and
remote panel modules have been configured under CRSC which provides a more elegant solution
to system design.
Figure 2-2 shows a sample NV9000 network, one of several possible topologies:
Remote Panel 1
Ethernet

P/R Net 1
Remote Panel 2
NV9000
P/R Net 2
House Net
Ethernet

Router 1

Router 2
Config
PC
•••

•••

Router n

Figure 2-2. NV9000 Network of Routers

An NV9000 network supports a larger number of routers. Commands issue from the remote panels
to the NV9000 which then dispatches the instructions to the routers. The routers return status to the
NV9000 which in turn relays the status to the remote panels.
CR Series routers can be used with a NV9000 Router Control System or a NV915 Router Control
System. These router control systems extend the capabilities of the compact routers.

6 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

An NV9000 network is constructed and operated according to the requirements of the NV9000
router control system. Configuration and control of the routers is entirely within the scope of
NV9000-SE Utilities, although you can use CRSC to designate IP addresses. See NV9000 Router
Control Systems (page 142) and Compact Routers in an NV9000 System (page 143).
Figure 2-3 shows the ways a “clean and quiet” router can be connected:
CQX Router
Config Local CQX Panel
PC
Ethernet
Remote CQX Panel

Figure 2-3. CQX Network

At present, the CQX connections are limited. One CQX router with a local (or captive) CQX panel
or a remote CQX panel (or both) can exist on any subnet. (You can have more than one subnet,
however.)
At present there is little to configure other than the IP address of the router (and possibly the remote
panel module).

Software
CRSC (Compact Router System Configurator) is a configuration and monitoring tool for compact
routers and remote panels. Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for details.
S CrConfig (a precursor to CRSC) is no longer supported.

Benefits
The CR Series Compact Routers offer these benefits:
• Miranda performance and quality.
• Very simple operation.
• Low cost.
• Small form factor.
• Easy migration to larger systems.

The Routers
The routers are slim (35–57mm or 1.38″–2.25″) and mechanically similar, differing principally in
the number and type of connectors. The fronts of all the 1RU routers are the same except for their
legends and the fronts of all the 2RU routers are the same except for their legends.
The 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and analog video routers have BNC connectors. The analog audio routers
have DB25 connectors (and fans). The machine control routers have RJ-45 connectors.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 7

2. Introduction
Overview

Figures 2-4 through 2-14 show front and rear views of the routers.

Figure 2-4. Front View of the CR1616-SD Digital Video Router

Figure 2-5. Rear View of the 16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES Routers

Figure 2-6. Front View of the CR3232-HD Digital Video Router

Figure 2-7. Rear View of the 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES Routers

Figure 2-8. Rear View of the CR1616-AV Analog Video Router

Figure 2-9. Rear View of the CR3232-AV Analog Video Router

Figure 2-10. Rear View of the CR1616-AA Analog Audio Router

Figure 2-11. Rear View of the CR3232-AA Analog Audio Router

8 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

Figure 2-12. Rear View of the CR16-PR Machine Control Router

Figure 2-13. Rear View of the CR32-PR Machine Control Router

Figure 2-14. Rear View of the 16×2 CQX Routers (3Gig, HD, or SD)

Some routers (e.g., the CR3204-AA or the CR0808-3Gig) have fewer input or output connectors
than shown here.
All compact routers save their state in non-volatile memory. Thus, if a power loss occurs, a router
can recover almost instantly. All compact routers require a few seconds to initialize.
All compact routers have an automation port (DE9, RS-422 or RS-485).
All routers except machine control routers and CQX routers accept these video reference rates:
NTSC (30/1.001) Hz frame rate 525 lines/frame
PAL 25 Hz frame rate 625 lines/frame
HD trilevel (24/1.001) Hz frame rate 1080p
24 Hz frame rate 1080p
25 Hz frame rate 1080i
(30/1.001) Hz frame rate 1080i
30 Hz frame rate 1080i
50 Hz frame rate 1080p, 720p
(60/1.001) Hz frame rate 1080p, 720p
60 Hz frame rate 1080p, 720p

The CQX routers accept these video reference rates:

Standard Reference Rates
525, SD NTSC (30/1.001 Hz)
625, SD PAL (25 Hz)
1080i, 59.94 Hz NTSC, HD 30/1.001 Hz
1080i, 50 Hz PAL, HD 25 Hz
720p, 59.94 Hz NTSC, HD 30/1.001 Hz, HD 60/1.001 Hz
720p, 50 Hz PAL, HD 25 Hz, HD 50 Hz
1080p, 59.94 Hz NTSC, HD 30/1.001 Hz
1080p, 50 Hz PAL, HD 25 Hz

The machine control routers do not receive video reference signals.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 9

2. Introduction
Overview

Digital Video Routers

(See CQX Video Routers, next page, for a discussion of the CQX routers.)
The 1RU digital video routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoint matrices, depending on the
model. The 2RU digital video routers have either 32×32 or 32×4 crosspoint matrices.
Figure 2-15 shows a simplified view of the digital video router:
M Crosspoint N
M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs
N = 4, 8, 16, or 32
(Equalized) (Reclocked)

Automation
µP Logic
Ethernet
Video
Reference

Control (optional)
Panel

Figure 2-15. Block Diagram of the Digital Video Router

The video routers perform input equalization and, except for the -NR models, perform reclocking
of outputs. The -NR models do not perform reclocking. Router outputs are switched in sync with an
external video reference if it is present.
All digital video routers accept bi-level or tri-level video references (sync) and switch according to
SMPTE RP168-2002.

3Gig Video Routers

All of the “3Gig” routers support 2.966Gb/s, and 2.97Gb/s video rates as well as a number of HD
bit rates and formats. The 3Gig routers reclock at 270Mb/s, 1.483Gb/s, 1.485Gb/s, 2.966Gb/s, and
2.97Gb/s. The 3Gig routers bypass re-clocking for other rates. Video references must be nominally
800mV p-p and bi-level or tri-level in nature.

HD Video Routers
All of the “HD” routers are SWB (super wide band) routers: they support a wide range of SD and
HD bit rates and formats, from 10Mbps to 1.5Gbps. With the exception of the -NR routers, the HD
routers reclock at 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540Mb/s and 1.483 and 1.485Gb/s and bypass re-clock-
ing for other rates. Video references must be nominally 800mV p-p and bi-level or tri-level in
nature. The HD routers support DVB-ASI signals.

SD Video Routers
All of the “SD” routers support a wide range of SD serial data rates from 10Mb/s to 540MB/s.
With the exception of the -NR routers, the SD routers reclock at 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540Mb/s.
The SD routers support DVB-ASI signals.

NR Video Routers
The HD and SD routers are available in non-reclocking models, such as the CR1616-HD-NR and
CR3204-SD-NR. These models are less expensive than the models that have reclocking circuitry
and work well with relatively noise-free signals. The reclocking models give better performance in
noisy environments.

10 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

CQX Video Routers

These 1RU “clean and quiet” video routers switch 16 inputs to 2 “clean and quiet” outputs and 6
auxiliary outputs.
The CQX routers have two crosspoint matrices. The first crosspoint routes 16 normal inputs either
to an internal mixer or to the second crosspoint matrix.
The mixer has 2 channels. Each channel mixes two inputs and produces an internal “clean” output.
One of the inputs is the signal previously routed to that channel and the other input is the signal that
will be routed to that channel. The mixer produces the transition between the previous input and the
next input according to the transition type and transition rate currently selected (at a control panel)
for the router.
For the SD and HD CQX routers, each input supports video plus 16 embedded audio channels. The
mixer transitions both the video and the audio without artifacts.
The 3Gig router supports both level A and level B of the SMPTE 425M standard. The mixer transi-
tions signals of level A, at 1080p, video and audio without artifacts. It handles level B — two 1080i
signals in one stream — somewhat differently. It mixes the 16 audio channels of “link A” (from the
two inputs) but passes the 16 audio channels of link B (from the two inputs) through to the output
unmixed. “Link B” will undergo a cut transition with possible audio artifacts. Although audio for
Link B is not processed and undergoes a cut transition, video for Link B is mixed according to the
transition type and rate selected on the CQX control panel.
S The 3Gig routers do not accept level B’s 2×720p signals at present.
The second crosspoint matrix receives internal signals and produces the CQX outputs 1 and 2 and
the 6 auxiliary outputs (which are normal outputs). A multiplexer selects either the clean output or
the emergency bypass input. The emergency bypass input is selected only when power fails. (The
multiplexer is controlled by a relay that switches to its relaxed position when power fails.)
The router has 16 normal input BNCs, 2 bypass input BNCs, 2 CQX output BNCs, and 6 aux out-
put BNCs.
Figure 2-15 shows a simplified view of the CQX digital video router:
clean 1
Mix 1 Reclock
CQX 1
clean 2 Em. Bypass 1
Mix 2
16
6 Reclock
Inputs CQX 2
(Equalized) Em. Bypass 2
2 non-sync
bypass 6
Reclock Aux Outputs

Automation
µP Logic Video Reference
Ethernet

GPIO
Control (optional)
Panel

Figure 2-16. Block Diagram of the CQX Digital Video Router

The video routers perform input equalization and perform reclocking of outputs. Router outputs are
switched in sync with an external video reference if it is present. The video reference also provides
sync for embedded audio.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 11

2. Introduction
Overview

All CQX video routers accept bi-level or tri-level video references (sync) and switch according to
SMPTE RP168-2002.
The CQX video routers also provide a bypass path for non-synchronous input signals. If the two
sources chosen for a clean and quiet switch are not of the same format, are off-rate, are not at the
same frame rate as the video reference, or do not meet the timing window (± 3 lines), the video pro-
cessor enters non-sync bypass mode where the source signal bypasses the video processor and goes
straight to the outputs. Thus, the clean and quiet output behaves like an aux output in which there is
no video or audio processing — with no transition processing. Switches still occur at the specified
switchpoint for the video reference, but they will not be “clean and quiet.”
However, if there is no video reference present, the CQX does the cut to the new source as soon as
it receives the command from the control panel and does not wait for the switchpoint.
Where one or both of the sources is off-rate or at a frame rate different from that of the video refer-
ence, the output will bypass the video processor.
If a clean and quiet output is in a non-sync state but conditions change so that a clean switch is pos-
sible, the processor waits for one frame of video before switching to processed video to ensure that
the processed video has enough time to pass through the video processing path.
The CQX video routers have a removable fan unit. The fan unit is not visible when a CQX panel is
mounted on the router.

Recessed Fan unit 16-pos Mode Switch

16-pos Frame ID Switch
Figure 2-17. Front View of the CQX Video Router

Customers should have no reason to remove the fan unit.

The CQX video routers have a “mode” switch in addition to the 16-position frame ID switch. Both
are 16-position rotary switches that turn with a small screwdriver. The “mode” switch configures
the video format of the router. See CQX Routers in Chapter 4, Configuration, for details.
The CQX routers perform video processing for these rates:
2 × 1080i, 59.94 Hz 2.96 Gb/s 3Gig
2 × 1080i, 50 Hz 2.97 Gb/s SMPTE 425 Level B

1080p, 59.94 Hz 2.96 Gb/s 3Gig

1080p, 50 Hz 2.97 Gb/s SMPTE 425 Level A, Mapping 1

1080i, 59.94 Hz 1.483 Gb/s HD

1080i, 50 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
720p, 59.94 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
720p, 50 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
625i, 50 Hz 270 Mb/s SD
525i, 59.94 Hz 270 Mb/s

The routers enter non-sync bypass mode for signals at all other rates.

12 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

Analog Video Routers

The 1RU analog video routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoints. The 2RU analog video rout-
ers have either 32×32 or 32×4 crosspoints.
Figure 2-18 shows a simplified view of an analog video router:
M Crosspoint N
M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs
N = 4, 8, 16, or 32

Automation
µP Logic
Ethernet
Video
Reference

Control (optional)
Panel

Figure 2-18. Block Diagram of the Analog Video Router

The analog video routers switch NTSC (525i) or PAL (625i) video signals. The router outputs are
switched in sync with an external video reference if it is present.

Digital Audio Routers

The 1RU AES routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoints. The 2RU AES routers have either
32×32 or 32×4 (stereo) crosspoints.
Figure 2-19 is a simplified view of an AES router:

M Crosspoint N
M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs
N = 4, 8, 16, or 32

Automation
µP Logic
Ethernet
Video
Reference

Control (optional)
Panel

Figure 2-19. Block Diagram of the AES Router

If a video reference is present, the router is considered “synchronous” and regenerates output at
48kHz (nominally). The routers also perform a certain amount of signal processing if the input is
synchronous. If a video reference is not present, the router is asynchronous and passes input signals
straight through without any processing.
In synchronous mode, the router can perform mono routing, in which case, the maximum number
of signals is 2N, that is 8, 16, 32, or 64. In asynchronous mode, the router processes AES stereo
pairs.
The “AES” routers switch AES3id audio. The AES routers switch in sync with a video reference if
one is present.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 13

2. Introduction
Overview

The two AES modes have different functional characteristics:

• Synchronous mode.
This mode is intended for 48kHz input. However, the router accepts input from 32kHz to
192kHz. The router produces AES3id output at 48kHz using adds and drops,1 as required. If
the input itself is locked to the video reference, no adds or drops occur.
The 16×16 router supports either 16×16 stereo switching or 32×32 mono channel switching
(when controlled by an external control system). The 32×32 router supports either 32×32 stereo
switching or 64×64 mono channel switching (when controlled by an external control system).
Refer to AES Routers on page 145 for more information.
S A control panel cannot and does not perform mono switching. It is only in external soft-
ware (CRSC, CRConfig, NV9000, or third-party software) that you can do that and then
only when the router is in synchronous mode (i.e., has a video reference).
• Asynchronous mode.
The router passes the input stream (32kHz–192kHz) transparently to the output with no audio
processing. The output is the same as the input and the output rate is the same as the input rate.
Because the router does no audio processing, it performs stereo switching only.
AES routers power up in asynchronous mode. If a video reference is present, the router immedi-
ately switches to synchronous mode. If no video reference is present, the router stays in asynchro-
nous mode.
If a video reference is applied at any time after power-up, the router immediately switches from
asynchronous to synchronous mode.

Important When the router is in synchronous mode, and video reference is lost, the router
waits 15 minutes (a “grace” period) before reverting to asynchronous mode. If you
need to switch from synchronous mode to asynchronous mode in less than 15 min-
utes, you can cycle power to the router with the video reference disconnected.

1 When the source and output AES streams are not in sync, AES samples arrive at a rate different from the rate at which
they leave the router. Add: when the source is slower than the output, router software occasionally inserts an extra copy
of the most recent sample in the output stream until the source and output are back in sync. Drop: when the source is
faster than the output, software occasionally does not send the sample(s) to the output until the source and output are back
in sync again. Adds and drops are performed on a minute scale, never in large blocks, keeping perceptible distortions to
a minimum.

14 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

Analog Audio Routers

The 1RU analog audio routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoints. The 2RU analog audio rout-
ers have either 32×32 or 32×4 (stereo) crosspoints. Figure 2-18 shows a simplified view of the ana-
log video router:

M Crosspoint N M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs N = 4, 8, 16, or 32

Automation
µP Logic
Ethernet
Video
Reference

Control (optional)
Panel

Figure 2-20. Block Diagram of the Analog Audio Router

The analog audio routers switch analog audio signals. Router outputs are switched in sync with an
external video reference if the reference is present and are switched asynchronously if no reference
is present.
The analog audio router passes input signals transparently to the output with no audio processing or
adjustments.
S Although the analog audio routers signals are stereo, the connectors are labeled as if the signals
were mono. A 16×16 router shows inputs and outputs numbered 1–32. A 32×32 router shows
inputs and outputs numbered 1–64. An 8×8 router shows inputs and outputs numbered 1–16.

Machine Control Routers

The machine control routers do not have X/Y crosspoints per se, but allow point-to-point connec-
tions. One input may connect to (at most) one output.
The 1RU machine control router has 16 bidirectional serial ports (RJ-45). The 2RU machine con-
trol router has 32. Figure 2-18 shows a simplified view of the machine control router:
N Crosspoint
Ports N = 16 or 32
Switch

Automation
µP Logic
Ethernet

Control (optional)
Panel

Figure 2-21. Block Diagram of the Machine Control Router

Machine routers channel serial data, typically commands in one direction and responses in the other
direction. Because the connections are bidirectional, a port is both an input and an output.
The machine control routers are defined as “data reverse” routers. Each port can be configured as
dynamic, master, slave, controlling, or controlled. Either CRConfig or CRSC is a requirement for
configuring the ports.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 15

2. Introduction
Overview

The machine control routers support serial communication up to 1 Mb/s.

Background Information
A device can be considered a “controlled” device or a “controlling” device.
Controlling device Compact Router Controlled device

SRC DST

Above, the source device is a controlling device. A destination can also be the controlling device:
Controlled device Compact Router Controlling device

SRC DST

A controlling device sends commands to a controlled device. The controlled device passes
responses (such as status) back to the controlling device. A source device can be a controlling
device or a controlled device. A destination device can be a controlling device or a controlled
device.
S Some external devices must be placed in “remote” mode to work with a port router.
A controlling port is one connected to a controlling device.
A controlled port is one connected to a controlled device.
The compact machine control routers operate in “data reverse” mode. This means that in any con-
nection, the destination device is the controlling device by default. The default can be overridden
by port type.
The 5 port types are variations of “controlled” or “controlling”:
Controlling Master Dynamic
Controlled Slave

Controlling or Controlled
These port settings fix the direction of the router port to “controlling” or “controlled.” The port’s
connection for Tx and Rx — made during configuration — is static and does not change during
operation.

Dynamic
A dynamic port can be a controlling or controlled port depending on whether it is connected to a
master port or slave port. The port’s configuration is dynamic and can change during operation.
Dynamic ports are typically assigned to VTRs.

Master or Slave
Any dynamic port connected to a “master” port will be changed to a controlled port. A “slave” port
is the opposite of a “master” port: any dynamic port connected to a slave port will be changed to a
controlling port.

16 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

The compact router applies logic to the port direction setting when a master port is connected to a
dynamic port. In this case, the machine at the dynamic port is always controlled and the machine at
the master port is always controlling.

Configuration
Configuring the ports of a machine control router requires either CRConfig or CRSC.

The Control Panels

Control panels are optional if you have an automation system.

1RU Panels
The CP1616 control panel has 38 buttons:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

Level Selection

Figure 2-22. Front view of the CP1616 Control Panel

The CP1604 control panel resembles the CP1616, but it has 4 buttons in the lower row on the left,
instead of 16. The CP1602 has 2 buttons in the lower row on the left.
The CP0808 has 2 rows of 8 buttons at the far left.
In stand-alone systems, a CP1616 has 16 source selection buttons, 16 destination selection buttons,
the 2 lock buttons shown, and 4 level selection buttons (as shown).
In a CRSC system, all buttons except the lock buttons (shown) are configurable. In an NV9000 sys-
tem, all buttons are configurable, including the lock buttons.
S You can mount a 1RU panel on any 1RU router or remote panel module.
The CP3201 is a 1RU panel that resembles the CP1616, but it has 32 source buttons (in 2 rows of
16) and no destination buttons. The CP3201 cannot be used as a captive panel. Its design requires a
CRSC or NV9000 network.

CQX Panel
The CP1602-CQX is also a 1RU control panel that has 38 buttons:
Inputs (16) Destination Lock Panel Lock

CQ Outputs (2) Aux Outputs (6) Transition Type Transition Rate (unused)
Figure 2-23. Front view of the CP1602-CQX Control Panel

The CP1602-CQX control panel has 16 source buttons, 2 CQX destination buttons, 6 auxiliary des-
tination buttons, 4 transition type buttons, 3 transition rate buttons, and 7 function buttons.
Of the function buttons, 5 are presently disabled, reserved for future use, and two are active. The
active buttons are ‘Destination Lock’ and ‘Panel Lock’.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 17

2. Introduction
Overview

2RU Panels
The CP3232 control panel has 76 buttons:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

Level Selection

Figure 2-24. Front view of the CP3232 Control Panel

The CP3204 control panel resembles the CP3232, but it has 4 buttons in the lower section on the
left, instead of 32.
In stand-alone systems, a CP3232 has 32 source selection buttons, 32 destination selection buttons,
the 2 lock buttons shown, and 4 level selection buttons (as shown).
In a CRSC system, all buttons except the lock buttons (shown) are configurable. In an NV9000 sys-
tem, all buttons are configurable, including the lock buttons.
S You can mount a 2RU panel on any 2RU router or remote panel module.
Except under NV9000 control, all control panels have two lock buttons (at the top right):
• Panel Lock. Protects the state of the entire panel.
• Destination Lock. Protects one or more destinations.
S Buttons are not labeled at the factory. If you want button legends, you must create your own.
See Button Legends on page 60.
A panel’s buttons have color: green, amber, red. In a CRSC system, the colors green and amber
have no particular meaning. In a CRSC system, the labels ‘Source’ and ‘Dest’ that you see on the
panel front also have no particular meaning. Any button, regardless of color or position— except
for the lock buttons — can be a source, a destination, or have any assignable function.
In stand-alone systems, green means source and amber means destination and the labels ‘Source’
and ‘Dest’ do have meaning. The group of buttons labeled ‘Source’ are (green) source buttons and
the group of buttons labeled ‘Dest’ are (amber) destination buttons.
In CRSC or NV9000 systems, the color of the button means little.
Buttons go high-tally (bright) when selected (pressed) and remain low-tally (dim) when they are
not selected.
For all but machine control routers, source buttons represent inputs and destination buttons repre-
sent outputs. For machine control routers, a port is both an input and an output. Source button n and
destination button n both represent port n.
The function buttons vary in color.
• Unused function buttons are not illuminated.
• The panel lock button, normally low-tally green, goes high tally red when the panel is locked.
• The destination lock button, normally amber, goes high tally red when the currently selected
destination is locked. When a destination is locked, the destination button goes high tally red as
a warning if you press it. The button color of locked destinations varies with the type of system.
Operating a control panel is usually very simple. See Operation on page 71.

18 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Overview

The Remote Panel Modules

Like the routers, the remote panel modules are slim (35 mm or 1.38″). Except that they have no I/O
connectors and no video reference connectors, remote panel modules are virtually the same size
and shape as the routers.
Figures 2-25 through 2-28 show front and rear views of the remote panel modules:

Figure 2-25. Front View of the RP16 Remote Panel Module

Figure 2-26. Rear View of the RP16 Remote Panel Module

Figure 2-27. Front View of the RP32 Remote Panel Module

Figure 2-28. Rear View of the RP32 Remote Panel Module

A remote panel module must have a CR Series control panel attached to be usable. The remote
panel module can be set up for operation under CRSC or NV9000.
Under CRSC, when you execute operations on the attached control panel, the remote panel module
sends commands to the network of routers and receives status messages from the routers. The
attached control panel shows router status on its buttons.
Under NV9000, when you execute operations on the attached control panel, the remote panel mod-
ule sends commands to the NV9000 and receives status messages from the NV9000 which commu-
nicates with the routers. The attached control panel shows router status on its buttons.
A stand-alone network allows up to 16 remote panel modules, up to 4 routers, and up to 4 levels.
A CRSC network allows up to 16 remote panel modules, up to 4 routers, up to 8 levels, and
enhanced capabilities.
An NV9000 network allows an indefinite number of remote panels, routers, and levels. The limita-
tions are the number of IP addresses in your network and of course the throughput of the network.
A network requires one or more customer-supplied Ethernet switches.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 19

2. Introduction
Features

Features
Routers
All CR Series compact routers have the following features and characteristics:
• Two power connections for redundancy. The routers have 2 indicator LEDs, one for each power
supply.
• One Ethernet port, supporting network operation.
• One copper grounding terminal.
• One 16-position rotary switch used for network installations. (This switch is hidden if a control
panel is mounted on the router.)
See Creating a Router Network, on page 43, for information regarding connections in a com-
pact router network. See Network Connection, on page 143, for information regarding connec-
tions under an NV9000 or NV915 router control system.
• Quick and easy control panel mounting.
• Non-volatile memory. Routes are preserved if power is shut off.
• One RS-485 (or RS-422) port, supporting third-party automation systems.
The CR Series analog audio routers have DB25 input and output connectors.
The CR Series machine control routers have RJ-45 port connectors.
All other compact routers have BNC inputs and outputs (75Ω).
All but the machine control routers have one pair of video reference connectors (BNC, 75Ω, loop-
through, non-terminating).

1RU Routers
Figures 2-29 through 2-40 show the 1RU router features.
16-position
Mounting Slots (4) Cover Plate over Control Panel Rotary Switch
Connector
Screw Holes (2) for Power Supply
Optional Control Panel LEDs

Figure 2-29. Front View, 1RU Router

3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers

The 16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES routers are characterized by a row of 16 inputs (BNC) and a
row of 16 outputs (also BNC). The 16×4 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES routers are similar to the 16×16
routers, but they have 4 outputs instead of 16. Figure 2-30 shows a rear view of the 16×16 router.

20 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

Figure 2-31 shows a rear view of the 16×4 router.

Ethernet connector
GND Terminal
RS-422 connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 16 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 14 15 16
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4 14 15 16
E146905

PS2

PS2, power 16 output connectors, BNC, 75W

connector

Figure 2-30. Rear View, 1RU Router (3Gig, HD, SD, or AES)

RS-422 connector Ethernet connector

Video reference
PS1,
power connector 16 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 15 16
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4
E14690
5

PS2

PS2, 4 output connectors, BNC, 75W

power connector GND Terminal

Figure 2-31. Rear View, 16×4 Digital Router (3Gig, HD, SD, or AES)

Inputs and Outputs,

GND
BNC connectors, 75W
Ethernet

RS-422 Video reference

Power connectors (PS1, PS2)

Figure 2-32. Top View, 1RU 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

Figures 2-33 and 2-34 shows a rear and top view of the 8×8 routers.
Ethernet connector
GND Terminal
RS-422 connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 8 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E146905

PS2

PS2, power 8 output connectors, BNC, 75W Lexan cover

connector plate

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 21

2. Introduction
Features

Figure 2-33. Rear View, 8×8 Digital Router (3Gig, HD, SD, or AES)

8 Inputs and 8 Outputs, BNC connectors, 75W

GND

Ethernet

RS-422 Video reference

Power connectors (PS1, PS2)

Figure 2-34. Top View, 8×8 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

Analog Video Router

The 1RU analog video router is mechanically similar to other 8×8, 16×16, or 16×4 routers with
BNC connectors except that the input and output BNCs have a different organization.
For the 16×16 analog video router, the inputs and outputs occur in blocks of 8:
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W Inputs 9–16, BNC, 75W
Video reference

VIDEO
REF
9K50
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
LOOP
THRU OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
E146905

Outputs 1–8, BNC, 75W Outputs 9–16, BNC, 75W

Figure 2-35. Rear View, 16×16 Analog Video Router

For the 16×4 router, the 16 inputs and 4 outputs are arranged as for the digital video routers:
RS-422 connector Ethernet connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 16 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 15 16
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4
E14690
5

PS2

PS2, 4 output connectors, BNC, 75W

power connector GND Terminal

Figure 2-36. Rear View, 16×4 Analog Video Router

For the 8×8 analog video router, the inputs and outputs also occur in blocks of 8:
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W
Video reference Lexan cover plate

VIDEO
REF
9K50
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
LOOP
THRU OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
E146905

Outputs 1–8, BNC, 75W

Figure 2-37. Rear View, 8×8 Analog Video Router

22 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

Analog Audio Router

The 1RU analog audio router is slightly deeper (57 mm) than any of the other 16×16 routers. Its
inputs and outputs use DB25 connectors:
Fan
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32

E146905

VIDEO INPUTS INPUTS

REF 1-8 9-16 17-24 25-32
LOOP
THRU

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16 Outputs 17–24 Outputs 25–32

Figure 2-38. Rear View, 16×16 Analog Audio Router

The 16×4 analog audio router has 4 output (pairs):

Fan
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32

E146905

VIDEO INPUTS INPUTS

REF 1-8 9-16 17-24 25-32
LOOP
THRU

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8

Figure 2-39. Rear View, 16×4 Analog Audio Router

Power I/O 1–8 I/O 25–32

connectors GND Fan
(PS1, PS2)
Video reference
Ethernet
RS-422
Figure 2-40. Top View, 1RU Analog Audio Router

The 4 input connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and 25–32, respectively, and are labelled
that way on the rear of the router. Inputs are treated as 16 stereo pairs.
The same is true for the outputs.
The 8×8 analog audio router has 8 input (pairs) and 8 output (pairs).
Fan Lexan Cover Plate
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16

E146905

VIDEO INPUTS INPUTS

REF 1-8 9-16
LOOP
THRU

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16

Figure 2-41. Rear View, 8×8 Analog Audio Router

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 23

2. Introduction
Features

Analog inputs are at the top; analog outputs are at the bottom (in the dark regions). Each DB25 con-
nector supports 8 inputs (or outputs) which are 4 input (or output) pairs:
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

The analog audio routers also have a small fan.

Machine Control Router

The 1RU machine control router has 16 RJ-45 ports.
Ethernet connector
GND Terminal
RS-422 connector

PS1,
power connector

PS1 CTRL
9K50
ETHERNET
DC
IN
+12V
E146905 1 2 3 4 511 12 13 14 15 16

PS2

PS2, power 16 Bidirectional Ports

connector

Figure 2-42. Rear View, 16-Port Machine Control Router

Power
Connectors
(PS1, PS2) Bidirectional Ports
GND
RS-422 Ethernet

Figure 2-43. Top View, 16-Port Machine Control Router

All ports are serial, RS-422, operating at up to 1 MB/s. The interface is RJ-45. Each port has the fol-
lowing pinout:
1 Gnd Controlling Controlled
2 n.c. Port Port
1
3 Tx + Rx +
4 Rx – Tx –
5 Rx + Tx +
6 Tx – Rx –
8 7 Gnd
8 Gnd

A port can be configured as “controlling” or “controlled” or variants (dynamic, master, slave). That
is, the definition of the port can be reversed (Tx becomes Rx and vice versa) either during configu-
ration or during operation.
Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for port configuration information.
Refer to Cabling on page 146 for additional information.

24 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

CQX Routers
There are 316×2 CQX router models: 3Gig, HD, and SD. In addition to power, serial, and Ethernet
connectors, these 1RU routers each have a row of 18 inputs (BNC), a row of 8 outputs (also BNC),
and a GPIO connector (DB25):
Bypass 1, 2
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W (BNC, 75W) Inputs 9–16, BNC, 75W

VIDEO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
REF
IN
LOOP BYP 1 BYP 2
THRU
GPI/O CQX AUX
E146905
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Video Reference GPIO Interface CQX Outputs Aux Outputs, BNC, 75W
(BNC, 75W)
Figure 2-44. Rear View, 1RU CQX Router (3Gig, HD, or SD)

There are 16 normal inputs, 2 emergency bypass inputs, 2 CQX outputs, and 6 aux outputs. The
bypass inputs are switched to the CQX output in the event of a power loss. (The bypass relays
switch when power is removed.)
The GPIO connector supports 16 TTL-level inputs and 4 high-power outputs. All are optically iso-
lated. See GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers on page 95.

2RU Routers
Figures 2-45 through 2-52 show the 2RU router features.
Mounting Slots (6) 16-position
Rotary Switch
Cover Plate over Control Panel
Screw Holes (2) for Optional Connector
Control Panel Power Supply
LEDs

Figure 2-45. Front View, 2RU Router

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 25

2. Introduction
Features

3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers

The 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES routers are characterized by 2 rows of 16 inputs and 2 rows of 16
outputs. The 32×4 routers are similar to the 32×32 routers, but they have only 4 outputs. Figure 2-
46 shows a rear view of a 32×32 digital router.
RS-422 connector Ethernet connector

PS1, PS2, Video reference

power connectors
32 input connectors, BNC, 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
LOOP 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16
DC THRU
IN
+12V
PS2 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16

9K50
E146905
17 18 19 20 29 30 31 32

GND Terminal 32 output connectors, BNC, 75W

Figure 2-46. Rear View, 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES Router

Figure 2-47 shows a rear view of the 32×4 router.

RS-422 connector Ethernet connector

PS1, PS2, Video reference

power connectors
32 input connectors, BNC, 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
LOOP 1 2 3 4 5 13 14 15 16
DC THRU
IN
+12V
PS2 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21

1 2 3 4

9K50
E146905

GND Terminal 4 output connectors, BNC, 75W

Figure 2-47. Top View, 32×4 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

Power
Connectors
(PS1, PS2) Inputs and Outputs
64 BNC connectors, 75W
Ethernet

RS-422 Video reference

GND Terminal

Figure 2-48. Top View, 2RU 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

26 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

Analog Video Router

The 2RU analog video router is mechanically similar to other 32×32 routers with BNC connectors
except that the input and output BNCs are grouped in blocks of 16:
Inputs 1–16, BNC, 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC, 75W

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20
LOOP
THRU 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24

OUTPUTS •••• OUTPUTS

9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28
K50
E146905 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32

Outputs 1–16, BNC, 75W Outputs 17–32, BNC, 75W

Figure 2-49. Rear View, 32×32 Analog Video Router

The 32×4 analog video router has 4 outputs:

Outputs 1–4, BNC, 75W Inputs 1–16, BNC, 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC, 75W

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20
LOOP
THRU OUTPUTS 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24

••••

9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28
K50
E146905 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32

Figure 2-50. Rear View, 32×4 Analog Video Router

Analog Audio Router

The 2RU analog audio router is slightly deeper (57 mm) than any of the other 32×32 routers. Its
inputs and outputs use DB25 connectors:
I/O 1–8 I/O 9–16 Fan I/O 33–40 I/O 41–48

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48

INPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS

17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

I/O 17–24 I/O 25–32 I/O 49–56 I/O 57–64

Figure 2-51. Rear View, 32×32 Analog Audio Router

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 27

2. Introduction
Features

The 32×4 analog audio router has 4 output (pairs):

I/O1–8 Inputs 9–16 Fan Inputs 33–40 Inputs 41–48

OUTPUTS
1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48

INPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS

17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32 Inputs 49–56 Inputs 57–64

Figure 2-52. Rear View, 32×4 Analog Audio Router

Power I/O 1–8, I/O 41–48,

connectors I/O 17–24 Fan I/O 57–64
(PS1, PS2)
Video reference
Ethernet
GND
RS-422

Figure 2-53. Top View, 2RU Analog Audio Router

Analog inputs are in the middle; analog outputs are at the top and bottom (in the dark regions).
Each DB25 connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs):
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

The 8 input connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56, and 57–64,
respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs are treated as 32 stereo pairs.
The same is true for the outputs.
The 2RU analog audio router also has a small fan.

28 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

Machine Control Router

The 2RU machine control router has 32 RJ-45 connectors.
RS-422 connector
PS1, PS2,
power connectors Ethernet connector
Bidirectional Ports 1–16

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1

DC
IN
+12V 1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15 16

PS2
••••

17 18 19 20 21 28 29 30 31 32
9K50
E146905

GND Terminal Bidirectional Ports 17–32

Figure 2-54. Rear View, 32-Port Machine Control Router

••••

Power
Connectors Bidirectional Ports
(PS1, PS2) Ethernet

RS-422
GND Terminal

Figure 2-55. Top View, 32-Port Machine Control Router

All ports are serial, RS-422, operating at up to 1 Mb/s. The interface is RJ-45. Each port has the fol-
lowing pinout:
1 Gnd Controlling Controlled
2 n.c. Port Port
1
3 Tx + Rx +
4 Rx – Tx –
5 Rx + Tx +
6 Tx – Rx –
8 7 Gnd
8 Gnd

A port can be configured as “controlling” or “controlled” or variants (dynamic, master, slave). That
is, the definition of the port can be reversed (Tx becomes Rx and vice versa) either during configu-
ration or during operation.
Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for port configuration information.
Refer to Cabling on page 146 for configuration information.

Control Panels
The behavior of control panels in stand-alone systems is very different from the behavior of control
panels in CRSC systems. That is because CRSC remote panel operation is configurable and stand-
alone panels are not configurable.
A “captive” panel in a CRSC system a stand-alone panel and therefore behaves unlike the remote
panels in the CRSC system.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 29

2. Introduction
Features

Stand-Alone Characteristics
In a stand-alone system, control panels have the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is fixed and the mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is fixed:
For machine control routers:
SRC button n corresponds to port n.
DST button n corresponds to port n.
For AES routers:
SRC button n corresponds to stereo input n or to mono inputs (2n–1, 2n).
DST button n corresponds to stereo output n or to mono outputs (2n–1, 2n).
For analog audio routers:
The connections (8 for each DB25) are labeled on the router. The 16×16 router has 32
inputs and 32 outputs. The 32×32 router has 64 inputs and 64 outputs. To determine which
stereo pair n corresponds to connection m, use the following formula.
n = (m +1) / 2 [integer division]
If m is odd, it is the left channel. If m is even, it is the right channel.
SRC button n corresponds to stereo input n.
DST button n corresponds to stereo output n.
For all other routers:
SRC button n corresponds to input n.
DST button n corresponds to output n.
• Source buttons are illuminated in green (high- or low-tally) and labeled ‘Source’. Destination
buttons are illuminated in amber (high- or low-tally) and labeled ‘Dest’.
• Function buttons:
The 4 buttons (immediately below the lock buttons) select levels 1 to 4, in that order. Other
function buttons are reserved for future use.

Characteristics of Panels in CRSC Systems

In a CRSC system, control panels have the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is configurable. The mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is config-
urable. Any button except the two lock buttons can be configured as source, destination, level
selection, or salvo button.
• That a button is green or amber has no particular meaning. The labels ‘Source’ and ‘Dest’ and
the numbers identifying the buttons have no particular meaning, although you can use the num-
bers to guide your hand to the button you want to press.
Under CRSC, source buttons and level buttons can turn red to indicate breakaway.

Characteristics Common to Both Systems

Control panels have the following common characteristics:
• Each button has a clear plastic cap that can be easily removed to accommodate customer-
defined button legends.
• Panel Lock, Destination Lock buttons (at the top right).
The Panel Lock button is normally low-tally green. It turns bright red when the panel is locked.
The Destination Lock button is normally low-tally amber. It turns bright red when a selected
destination is locked (unless none of the destination’s levels are selected).

30 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

• Two LEDs indicate whether the power supplies of the router or remote panel module on which
the control panel is mounted are connected and functioning.
• A control panel mounts easily and quickly on a router (or remote panel module) enclosure with
two knurled screws and an electrical connector. Connectors for the 1RU panels have 40 pins;
connectors for the 2RU panels have 60 pins.
S It is not possible to connect a 1RU panel to a 2RU router or remote panel module, or vice versa.

1RU Control Panels

The CP1616 control panel can connect to, and control, any of the 16×16 routers. It can also connect
to an RP16 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers. Figures 2-56 and
2-57 show the 16×16 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons Dest. Lock

Levels 1–4, from left to right

16 Destination Buttons

Figure 2-56. Front View, CP1616

Connector to Router

Function buttons
Source and Destination Buttons

Power Supply LEDs (2)

Knurled Screws (2)

Figure 2-57. Top View, CP1616

In CRSC systems, the buttons are all configurable except the lock buttons. In NV9000 systems, all
the buttons are configurable.
The CP1604 or the CP1602 control panel can connect to, and control, a 1RU router and can also
connect to an RP16 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers. Figures
2-58 and 2-59 show the 16×4 and 16×2 control panel features:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons Dest. Lock

4 Destination Buttons Levels 1–4, from left to right

Figure 2-58. Front View, CP1604

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 31

2. Introduction
Features

Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs

Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons Dest. Lock

Levels 1–4, from left to right

2 Destination Buttons

Figure 2-59. Front View, CP1602

Here too, the illustrations show the fixed meaning of the buttons when the panel is used in a stand-
alone system.
The CP0808 control panel can connect to any 1RU router. It was designed for 8×8 routers:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
Dest. Lock
8 Source Buttons ...

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 Destination Buttons ... Levels 1–4, from left to right

Figure 2-60. Front View, CP0808

The CP3201 is a 1RU panel that resembles the CP1616 except that most of its buttons are green. In
a stand-alone network or NV9000 network, the CP3201 has 32 source buttons and no destination
buttons. In a CRSC network, the buttons are configurable. The CP3201 is not supported in stand-
alone mode.
The CP1602-CQX is different. See CQX Control Panel, following.

CQX Control Panel

The CP1602-CQX control panel is also a 1RU panel. It can connect to, and control, any of the CQX
routers. It can also connect to an RP16 remote panel module and control any of the CQX routers.
S Although it can connect to any 1RU compact router, the CP1602-CQX can control only a CQX
router. When placed on a remote panel module, it can control only one CQX router. It must not
be deployed in a network of other routers.
S When the CP1602-CQX is placed on a remote panel module, its transition buttons have no
effect on the CQX router.
Figure 2-61 shows the CP1602-CQX features:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons
Dest. Lock

2 CQX 6 Aux 4 Transition Type Buttons 3 Transition Rate Buttons Unused Buttons (for future enhancements)
Destinations Destinations . . .

Figure 2-61. Front View, CP1602-CQX

32 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

2RU Control Panel

The CP3232 control panel can connect to, and control, any of the 32×32 compact routers. It can
also connect to an RP32 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers.
Figures 2-62 and 2-63 show the 32×32 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Panel Lock Button Power
Dest. Lock Button Supply
32 Source Buttons LEDs

Levels 1–4,
from left to right

32 Destination Buttons
Figure 2-62. Front View of the CP3232

Connector to Router

Function Buttons (12)

Source and Destination Buttons

Power Supply LEDs (2)

Knurled Screws (2)

Figure 2-63. Top View of the CP3232

In CRSC systems, the buttons are all configurable except the lock buttons.
The CP3204 control panel can connect to, and controls, a 2RU router and can also connect to an
RP32 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers. Figure 2-64 shows the
32×4 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Panel Lock Button Power
Dest. Lock Button Supply
32 Source Buttons LEDs

Levels 1–4,
from left to right

4 Destination Buttons

Figure 2-64. Front View, CP3204

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 33

2. Introduction
Features

Remote Panel Modules

The remote panel modules have the following features and characteristics:
• Two power connections for redundancy. The remote panel modules have 2 indicator LEDs, one
for each power supply.
• One RS-422 port.
• One Ethernet port, supporting network operation.
• One copper grounding terminal.
• One 16-position rotary switch used for network installations. (This switch is hidden if a control
panel is mounted on the router.)
See Creating a Router Network, on page 43, for information regarding connections in a com-
pact router network. See Network Connection, on page 143, for information regarding connec-
tions under an NV9000 or NV915 router control system.
• A control panel mounts easily and quickly on the remote panel module with two knurled screws
and a 40- or 60-pin connector.
• Non-volatile memory.

1RU Remote Panel Module

The RP16 remote panel module — coupled with a 1RU panel — can be used to control a network of
mixed compact routers. Figures 2-65 through 2-67 show its features:
Mounting Slots (4) 16-position
Cover Plate over Rotary Switch
Screw Holes (2) for Control Panel Connector Power Supply
Optional Control Panel LEDs

Figure 2-65. Front View, RP16

Serial connector

PS1, Ethernet connector GND Terminal (unused)

power connector

PS1 CTRL 9K50

CONFIG
ETHERNET ON DIP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DC
IN
+12V E146905

PS2

PS2, power
connector

Figure 2-66. Rear View, RP16

Ethernet
GND
Serial port

Power connectors (PS1, PS2)

Figure 2-67. Top View, RP16

34 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2. Introduction
Features

2RU Remote Panel Module

The RP32 remote panel module — coupled with a 2RU panel — can be used to control a network of
mixed compact routers. Figures 2-68 through 2-70 show its features:
Mounting Slots (6)
16-position
Screw Holes (2) for Optional Rotary Switch
Control Panel Cover Plate over Power Supply
Control Panel Connector LEDs

Figure 2-68. Front View, RP32

Serial connector

PS1, PS2, Ethernet connector (unused)

power connectors

CTRL
CONFIG
ON
ETHERNET
DIP

PS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DC
IN
+12V
PS2

9K50
E146905

GND Terminal

Figure 2-69. Rear View, RP32

Power
Connectors Ethernet
(PS1, PS2)
Serial port
GND Terminal

Figure 2-70. Top View, RP32

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 35

2. Introduction
Features

CRSC
CRSC (Compact Router System Configurator) is configuration software that runs on your PC. A
compact router network developed using CRSC offers many benefits:
• Configurable panels with a choice of operating modes.
• Flexible networking.
• Router partitions (levels).
• Configuring the ports of a machine control router.
• Maintenance and monitoring.
CRSC is a Java application, available on the software and documentation CD (SB0033). It takes
less than a minute to install and is easy to use. See the CRSC User’s Guide for details.
CRSC might require that your older routers and remote panel modules be updated with firmware
compatible with CRSC. This should present no problem to you other than the few minutes it takes.
You can use CRSC to initialize your remote panel module(s) for use with a NV9000 network and to
restore those remote panel module(s) to use under CRSC.

36 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

3. Installation

Chapter 3 provides installation and connection instructions. It presents the following topics:
• Package Contents
• Design Considerations
• Rack Mount
• Installing Software
• Creating a Router Network
• Setting Up Your Configuration PC
• Power-Up
• Testing

Package Contents
If you have ordered CR Series products from Miranda, you should inspect the shipping container
for damage. If you find any container damage, unpack and inspect the contents. If the contents are
damaged, notify the carrier immediately.
As you unpack the shipping container, look for the packing slip and compare it against the contents
to verify that you received everything as ordered. If anything is missing (or if you find equipment
damage unrelated to shipping), please contact Miranda. For technical support, refer to Technical
Support Contact Information on page iii.
Depending on your order, the CR Series items that can ship include:
• One or more routers.
• One or more control panels.
• One or more remote panel modules.
• One or more power supplies, with straps that secure the AC power cords to the power supplies.
• User’s guides (this document in particular), CRSC software and firmware, CRConfig software,
and button legend templates in different formats, on a CD.
• A quick-start guide (hard copy).
The package does not contain network cables, video cables, BNC terminators, mounting screws, or
grounding wire. You do not need to take any special precautions regarding ESD.
This document does not address the shipment or installation of any other equipment or software
that can be used in conjunction with Compact Routers (including the NV9000 system controller,
NV915 system controller, NV96xx control panels, EC9700 GUI, EC9710 GUI, and configuration
programs such as UniConfig or the NV9000-SE Utilities).

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 37

3. Installation
Design Considerations

Design Considerations
By the time you are ready to install your equipment and software, you (or someone in your organi-
zation) will have already made most of the system design decisions. In fact, the design decisions
will have been made before the equipment is ordered. The following is a review of the concepts.
There are several ways to use compact routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels. Here, the panels and routers are configured (and
optionally monitored) using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 or NV915 router control system.
• A standalone CQX (clean and quiet) router with either a captive (local) CQX control panel or a
remote CQX panel.

Stand-Alone Router
The most basic compact router system is a single stand-alone router with an attached (or “captive”)
control panel. A stand-alone router will work reliably and operation is extremely simple.
The single router can switch signals of its own type — HD, SD, AES, etc. — and supports one or
more signal types and rates. Operation of the router through an automation system is possible.

Stand-Alone Network
A stand-alone network will include 1–4 routers and optionally one or more control panels. A stand-
alone network supports up to 16 remote panels. Panels are optional only if there is a control system
that can perform takes and locks.
If an automation system is in use, the network might not require any panels at all.
Each router in the network is considered a level. The levels range from 1 to 4. The routers can be
switched either independently or simultaneously for multi-level takes.
S If you have 32×32 routers in your network, you will require a 32×32 control panel to handle all
32 inputs and outputs.

CRSC Network
A CRSC network will include 1–4 routers and at least one remote panel.
A CRSC network is highly configurable. Control panels are almost completely configurable. Each
router in the network can be partitioned. Up to 8 “levels” (generally corresponding to signal types)
can be switched in a CRSC network.
A CRSC network supports the concept of sources and destination. A source is a specific combina-
tion of input ports on one or more levels. A destination is a specific combination of output ports on
one or more levels.
Because sources and destinations are not tied to specific inputs and outputs, a CRSC network more
effectively utilizes the router ports. You can do more with less.

38 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Rack Mount

A CRSC network supports salvos.

A CP3201 can be used in a CRSC network (because sources and destinations are not tied to specific
inputs and outputs).
CRSC supports advanced Ethernet connections (e.g., gateway connections).

CQX Routers
At present, a CQX router must operate by itself with a CQX control panel (or automation). Do not
place a CQX router on a subnet with other routers. You can have more than one subnet dedicated to
CQX routers, however.
The CQX panel can be local (mounted on a CQX router) or it can be remote (mounted on a remote
panel module). The remote CQX panel then must be connected to the CQX router by an Ethernet
switch.
As product development continues, we expect the networking capabilities of CQX routers and pan-
els to expand.

Router Control Systems

A router control system (e.g., the NV9000 or NV915) can switch video and audio (and other signal
types) elegantly and in fact offers a number of other features and services not available in the CR
Series routers alone.
An NV9000 or NV915 system also supports a number of additional hardware and software control
panels. Thus, in a system under NV9000 control, CR Series control panels are optional.
Remote panel modules require a specific setup step to work under NV9000. With that setup they
act as NV9000 panels and are configured using NV9000-SE Utilities. Other NV9000 panels can
also be used to control compact routers.

Rack Mount
Whether stand-alone, used in a network, or used in a router control system, the CR Series routers
and remote panel modules are designed to mount in a 19″ rack. This is not a requirement, but we
assume a 19″ rack for the sake of simplicity.
Follow these steps to install a CR Series device:
1 Set the position of the 16-position rotary switch on the front of the router or remote panel mod-
ule. (It is not on the control panel. If the control panel is mounted on the router, you must detach
the control panel from the router to see the switch.)
If you have a stand-alone router, set the switch to any non-zero position.
If you have a stand-alone router network, refer to Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Net-
works, on page 44 for information on how the rotary switch is used.
If you have a CRSC router network, refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for information on how the
rotary switch is used.
If you are using the router in a control system, refer to Network Connection on page 143 for
information on how the rotary switch is used.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 39

3. Installation
Rack Mount

Use a small screwdriver to turn the rotary switch.

S In a network, all devices must have unique IP addresses. An IP address is determined (at
least initially) by the rotary switch at the front of the device. The rotary switches for routers
must (at least initially) be distinct. The rotary switches for remote panel modules must (at
least initially) be distinct. However, a remote panel module may have the same switch set-
ting as a router. Their address spaces are separate by default.
2 If the router is to have a control panel, place the control panel on the front of the router, mating
the electrical connector on the panel to the electrical connector on the router. The fit requires
only minimal force. Tighten the knurled screws that secure the control panel to the router.
S A 2RU panel does not work with, or even fit on, a 1RU router and vice versa. Do not try to
connect a control panel to the wrong type of router or remote panel module.
You may install a control panel’s button legends at any time. See Button Legends on page 60.
3 Mount, and secure, the router assembly in the rack.
For the 1RU routers (or assemblies), the mounting holes are spaced 1.25″ (31mm) vertically
and allow approximately 1/8″ (3mm) of movement horizontally.
For the 2RU routers (or assemblies), the 3 mounting holes on each side are spaced 1.25″
(31mm) and 1.75″ (44mm) (3″, 76mm, overall) vertically and allow approximately 1/8″
(3mm) of play horizontally.
S Because the routers are short and thin, you might not have enough space to reach behind the
router and make connections. In that case, leave this step until last.
4 If you are using the router on a network, connect an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) from the network
switch to the Ethernet port of the router.
See Creating a Router Network, on page 43, for information about Compact Router networks.
See Network Connection, on page 143, for information about router control systems.
5 If you intend to use the router in an automation system, connect the 9-pin serial port to a serial
port of your automation system. Contact Miranda for information about the serial protocol and
automation systems.
6 Optionally, connect your video reference.
AES routers require a video reference to operate in synchronous mode. SDI routers require a
reference to perform switches in accordance with SMPTE RP168.
Each router (except the machine control routers) has two video reference BNC connectors. You
can connect the reference source to either one. If you have more than one router, you can “daisy
chain” the output of one reference connector to the input of another. The output of the last con-
nector in the series should be terminated with a 75Ω BNC terminator.
7 Optionally connect the ground lug to ground. Use copper wire from 14 to 6 AWG. Grounding
decisions are left to you or your facilities manager. Failure to connect the ground will not affect
normal operation, but connecting the ground will protect you and your equipment in a power
anomaly such as a lightning strike.
8 Connect one or both power supplies. First connect the 4-pin connector to PS1 or PS2 on the rear
of the router. The connectors are keyed and snap into place. There is only one way they fit. Do
not force them. Then connect the power supply to AC power.

n.c. 3 1 12 VDC 12 VDC 1 3 n.c.

n.c. 4 2 GND GND 2 4 n.c.

Receptacle Plug

40 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Installing Software

The second power connection is for redundancy only (protection against failure) and is not a
requirement for operation.
See Trouble-Shooting on page 85 if the power LED on the front of the router (or control panel)
fails to light.
9 Connect input devices and output devices. No particular order or combination is required. How-
ever, if the router is controlled by an Miranda router control system, the configuration you cre-
ate for your system controller will have to match the devices you connect.
Many I/O connections use standard 75Ω BNC connectors. Use Belden 1694A or equivalent
cable, up to 100m for 3Gig video (80 m for 3Gig CQX routers), up to 150m for HD video or up
to 400m for SD video.
Analog audio connectors are DB25. You can obtain DB25 breakout cables from Miranda or
build your own. (The Miranda part number is WC0053.)
Machine control ports (RJ-45) could take ordinary Ethernet cable. However, it is probable that
you will need to connect devices that have DE9 connectors. A DE9 to RJ-45 cable is required:
This is the RJ-45 to DE9 mapping for RS-422:
RJ-45 DE9
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9

This cable wiring is applicable whether the port is a controlling port or controlled port. See the
CRSC User’s Guide for information about port configuration.

Installing Software
The CRSC and CRConfig software is optional. Neither is required when you want to develop a
stand-alone or NV9000 compact router network.
CRSC is required if you want to have a CRSC network. (You can also use it to change the IP
addresses of routers in an NV9000 network.)
S CRConfig is obsolete and no longer available.
S We recommend that you install CRSC (or CRConfig) first before creating a network. You will
have a way to view the status of your network as you build it.
S CRConfig runs in a window that, for optimal use, needs at least 1020×600 pixels. CRSC runs in
a window that is at least 1024×768 pixels. You should have a monitor capable of displaying a
window of that size.
S CRSC comes with a compact router firmware file that you should upload to all your routers and
remote panels (if you intend to have a CRSC network.)

Installing CRSC
CRSC, its user’s guide (and this user’s guide) are available through the Miranda website.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 41

3. Installation
Installing Software

Double-click the installer icon to install CRSC:

Click ‘Next’ in this window and other windows to advance through the installation process. Click
‘Back’ to retrace your steps and change the installation. Click ‘Cancel’ at any time to stop the
installation. (The installation takes less than a minute.)
Step 2 asks you to designate a folder in which to install the software:

Click ‘Next’. Step through the remaining screens, clicking next to proceed. When the installation
has completed, the installer displays a completion message:

Click ‘Finish’ to exit from the installer and return to the ‘CR Series’ window of the CD window.

42 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

The installer creates a desktop icon and a Start menu entry. The default location for the application
is:
C:\Program Files\NVision\Compact Router System Configurator\[Link]
The Start menu entry is:
Start > Programs > NVision > Compact Router System Configurator
Finally, launch CRSC to verify that it executes. You must create a router network before you can
put CRSC to use. Your configuration PC must be on that network. The next section, Creating a
Router Network, tells you how to set up the network.

Creating a Router Network

There are two main reasons to create a router network:
• To perform multi-level operations (takes and locks).
• To operate individual routers or network of routers remotely (e.g., from a separate room).

Stand-Alone Networks
A router network comprises the following items:
• From 1 to 15 remote panel modules (with attached control panels).
• From 1 to 4 compact routers. You can mix routers of any size and type according to your
requirements. Keep in mind that a 16×16 remote panel module cannot control inputs or outputs
numbered 17 and higher.
• Optionally, one or more PCs (running Windows XP) on which you have installed CRConfig.
• An Ethernet switch (or hub) capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to accommodate
your routers, remote panel modules, and PCs.
Figure 3-1 shows a sample network of routers with remote panel modules:
Remote Panel 1

Remote Panel 2

PC with CRConfig

Ethernet Switch

Router 1

Router 2

Router 3

Router 4

Figure 3-1. Network of Routers

It is permissible to have a control panel on any router, if that is what you want. Those routers can be
switched both locally and remotely.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 43

3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Networks

Each router in the network is considered a level. Each router and remote panel module requires an
IP address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a router to set its IP address and level.
Use the rotary switch on the front of a remote panel module to set its IP address.
For routers,
Level = switch value (1–4).
address = switch value + 100.
The IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 104 and correspond to the router levels.
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for remote panel modules range from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.
You must assign an IP address to the PC that runs CRConfig, if you intend to use it. See Setting Up
Your Configuration PC on page 50.

CRSC Networks
A CRSC network comprises the following items:
• From 1 to 16 remote panel modules (with attached control panels).
• From 1 to 4 compact routers. You can mix routers of any size and type according to your
requirements. A router can be partitioned. Each partition is a level. There can be up to 8 levels.
Panels in a CRSC network are highly configurable and do not have some of the constraints that
panels in a stand-alone network have.
• Optionally, one or more PCs (running Windows XP or Vista) on which you have installed
CRSC.
• An Ethernet switch (or hub) capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to accommodate
your routers, remote panel modules, and PCs.
You can have multiple CRSC networks. CRSC can detect multiple networks if your configuration
PC has the network connections to do so. CRSC can work with only one at a time and that is called
the “active subnet.”

44 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

Figure 3-1 shows a sample network of routers with remote panel modules:
Remote Panel 1

Remote Panel 2

PC with CRSC

Ethernet Switch

Router 1

Router 2

•••

Router 4

Figure 3-2. Network of Routers

Although captive panels (those mounted on routers) are permissible, these panels do not have the
capabilities of remote panels. Captive panels operate in stand-alone mode, controlling only the
router on which they are mounted, and are extraneous to the CRSC network.

Levels and IP Addresses in CRSC Networks

(Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for complete detail.)
Each router in the network is considered a level. Each router and remote panel module requires an
IP address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a router to set its IP address and level.
Use the rotary switch on the front of a remote panel module to set its IP address.
For routers,
Level = switch value.
address = switch value + 100.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, by default, the subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 115.
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for remote panel modules range from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.
CRSC allows you to change the IP address of any router or remote panel module. CRSC supports
router partitioning. A partition is also called a level. You can have 8 levels in a CRSC network. The
level numbers can be in the range [1–250] and must be unique. In other words, CRSC allows you to
override the defaults obtained from the rotary switch settings.
You must also assign an IP address to the PC that runs CRSC, if you intend to use it. See Setting Up
Your Configuration PC, following.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 45

3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

I/O connections
Depends on your hardware and how you configure the routers and panels. Configuration depends
on your hardware and your I/O connections. In other words, there is a cyclic dependency among the
system design issues. At some point during the design process, you must define your I/O connec-
tions in CRSC.

CQX Networks
At present, a CQX router must operate by itself with a CQX control panel (or automation). Do not
place a CQX router on a subnet with other routers. You can have more than one subnet dedicated to
CQX routers, however.
Figure 3-3 shows the ways a “clean and quiet” router can be connected:
CQX Router
Config Local CQX Panel
PC
Ethernet
Remote CQX Panel

Figure 3-3. CQX Network

The CQX panel can be local (mounted on a CQX router) or it can be remote (mounted on a remote
panel module). The remote CQX panel then must be connected to the CQX router by an Ethernet
switch. It is possible to use both a captive panel and a remote panel.
Unlike other compact routers, the CQX routers have two rotary switches. You must set both
switches to an appropriate value.

Mode Rotary Switch

The ‘Mode’ rotary switch configures the router’s video format.
Set this 16-position rotary switch to a position in the range 0–5 according to this table:
Setting Format
0 1080i, 59.94
1 1080i, 50
2 525i 59.94
3 625i, 50
4 720p, 59.94
5 720p, 50

The 1080p formats are not yet available. The default is 1080i, 59.94 Hz (switch setting 0).
S Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router.

46 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

Frame ID Rotary Switch

You must set up the IP addresses for the router (and a remote panel, if you have one). First, use the
rotary switch on the router (and remote panel module) to set an initial IP address:
For a CQX router,
address = switch value + 200.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, address ranges from 201 to 215. However, use only a switch setting in the range 1–4
(addresses 201 to 204).
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The default IP address is [Link].
Here, address ranges from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0 because 0 causes the
router or remote panel module to be reset.
After you perform the setup using the rotary switches, you can use CRSC to change the IP
addresses from the defaults.
S Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

NV9000 Networks
An NV9000 network has connectivity that differs from a CRSC network. The chief difference is
the presence of the NV9000 system controller(s):
Remote Panel 1
P/R Net 1 or 2

•••
•••

NV9000
Remote Panel n
House Net

Ethernet

Router 1

Router 2
Config
•••

PC
•••

Router n

Figure 3-4. Standalone Router vs. a Network of Routers

The NV9000 is the center of activity and the remote panel modules do no significant processing
whereas in a CRSC network, the remote panel modules do all the processing and there is no
NV9000.
S CRSC is still a requirement for configuring an NV9000 network. NV9000-SE Utilities is also
required.
The NV9000 network comprises the following items:
• An indefinite number of remote panel modules (with attached control panels).

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 47

3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

• An indefinite number of compact routers. You can mix routers of any size and type according to
your requirements. A router can be partitioned. Each partition is a (physical) level. There can be
up to 8 levels. The levels must be identically configured in NV9000-SE Utilities.
Panels in an NV9000 network are configurable and must be configured in NV9000-SE Utili-
ties. Many of the features and concerns of panel configuration in a CRSC network are not
present in panel configurations in an NV9000 network.
• Optionally, one or more PCs (running Windows XP or Vista) on which you have installed
CRSC and NV9000-SE Utilities.
• One or more Ethernet switch (or hub) capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to
accommodate your routers, remote panel modules, and PCs.
The NV9000 system controller has 2 panel/router network ports by default. The NV915 has
one. You need an Ethernet switch for each port in use.

Levels and IP Addresses in NV9000 Networks

(Please refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for complete configuration details.)
Levels and IP addresses are configured for NV9000 networks as they are for CRSC networks.
However, levels must also be configured in NV9000-SE Utilities. The NV9000-SE Utilities config-
uration must match levels you define in CRSC. If the configurations are not identical, your routers
will probably not switch the correct signals.
Remote panel modules must also be configured in NV9000-SE Utilities.
There are 3 parts to installing an NV9000 network.
• Initial setup of routers, levels, and remote panel modules in CRSC.
• Configuration of routers, levels, and panels in NV9000-SE Utilities.
• Cabling of the control connections and cabling of the I/O.
The initial setup in CRSC turns off the factory defaults in the routers and remote panel modules.
After that initial setup, they are ready to be deployed in your NV9000 network.

In CRSC
At the beginning of the initial setup, each router requires a unique IP address and each remote panel
module requires a unique address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a router to set
its IP address and level. Use the rotary switch on the front of a remote panel module to set its IP
address.
For routers,
Level = switch value.
address = switch value + 100.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, by default, the subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 115. Initially, each router in the
network has one level. You can define new levels, up to a total of 8.
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for remote panel modules range from 51 to 65.

48 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Creating a Router Network

The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.
CRSC allows you to change the IP address of any router or remote panel module. The NV9000 will
almost certainly require it. You will define the IP addresses in CRSC and reference them in the
NV9000 configuration.
Change the IP addresses of your devices in CRSC’s ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ page. Do not for-
get to click ‘Apply Updates’.
CRSC supports router partitioning. A partition is also called a level. You can define 8 levels in
CRSC. The level numbers can be in the range [1–250] and must be unique. Your level definitions
will depend on your system design. You can change your level assignments at any time. Do not for-
get to click ‘Update Router Levels’.
For remote panels to function properly in an NV9000 network, you must set them up for use as
“dumb panels.” In CRSC’s ‘Setup NV9000 Remote Panels’ page, for each remote panel module,
check ‘Enable NV9000 Mode’. We recommend that you check ‘Use DHCP ...’ also. Do not forget
to click ‘Update Remote Panel’.
The NV9000 normally uses DHCP to assign IP addresses to its panels. If you do not configure your
remote panel modules for DHCP, you will have to configure your NV9000 system not to use
DHCP.

In NV9000-SE Utilities
You must create a definition for each router you have in your system. In this guide, we are inter-
ested only in compact routers, but your system certainly may include other routers.
You must create a configuration for each remote panel in your system. Your system may also
include NV96xx panels.
The levels you define for the routers in NV9000-SE Utilities must match the levels defined in
CRSC. You must specify the same number of levels, the same level numbers, and the levels must
be of the same size. NV9000-SE Utilities also allows you to define “level sets.” You must have at
least one level set. A suitable level set might be one that includes all levels.
Once panels and routers are defined in NV9000-SE Utilities, you must enumerate the inputs and
outputs (i.e., map sources to router partitions and input connector numbers and map destinations to
router partitions and output connector numbers.) You can do this in the ‘Devices’ page or using the
‘Add Device’ or ‘Add Multiple Devices’ tools.
Further, you can define system salvos in NV9000-SE Utilities and assign them to panel buttons.
Salvos are a topic outside the scope of this guide. Refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide.
Also refer to the NV9000 Network Example on page 135.
S Note that AES setup in NV9000-SE Utilities is unusual. Exercise care: you must use the odd
channel numbers to represent the I/O pairs at the rear of your compact router(s).
You must also assign an IP address to the configuration PC. Your PC might have to appear on the
NV9000’s house net (or the NV915’s “Config” net) and on the panel/router network. See Setting
Up Your Configuration PC, following.

I/O connections
Your I/O connections depend on your hardware and how you configure the routers and panels.
Configuration depends on your hardware and your I/O connections. In other words, there is a cyclic

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 49

3. Installation
Setting Up Your Configuration PC

dependency among the system design issues. At some point during the design process, you must
define your I/O connections in NV9000-SE Utilities.
Refer to the NV9000 Network Example on page 135.

Setting Up Your Configuration PC

Your configuration PC must be assigned an IP address on the same subnet as one of your compact
router networks. The factory default subnet is [Link]. It is expected that you will use a sub-
net appropriate for your system. Follow these steps to configure your PC’s address:
1 Launch ‘Settings>Network Connections’ from you PC’s Start menu. The following window
appears:

2 Double-click ‘Local Area Connection’. Then, choose the ‘General’ tab and click ‘Properties’.

50 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Setting Up Your Configuration PC

3 Select ‘Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)’. Click ‘Properties’ again:

4 Select ‘Use the following IP address’ and enter the IP address for your PC. Use the default sub-
net mask.

The IP address must be on the same subnet as (one of) your compact router network(s). We rec-
ommend that you choose an IP subnet address that is not in the range 100–115 or 50–65. Those
ranges are used as defaults.
5 Click OK to finish.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 51

3. Installation
Setting Up Your Configuration PC

Multiple Subnets
If you have multiple subnets in your compact router system, you will probably have to add those
subnets to your PC’s network configuration. Doing this is especially important for CQX routers.
Follow these guidelines:
1 Starting from step 4 in the preceding procedure, click the ‘Advanced’ button:

2 Click the ‘Add’ button and enter an IP address for your PC on each of the subnets:

3 After adding IP addresses for your subnets, click OK.

52 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Power-Up

Power-Up
Apply power to each router, each remote panel module, and the Ethernet switch if you have a net-
work. The network should initialize and stabilize in a few seconds.
If you have CRSC connected, you can perform a quick check to see whether your network is oper-
ating. In CRSC, click ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ at the top left. In the Ethernet settings page,
click ‘Refresh List’. All your routers and remote panel modules should appear in the list of CR
Series devices.
If you have a CRSC network that has already been configured, the network will require a few more
seconds to perform its “discovery” especially if it is a complex network.
If you have a CRSC network and have yet to perform any configuration, follow the steps described
in the CRSC User’s Guide.
If your system fails in any way, refer to Trouble-Shooting, on page 85, or Testing, next.

Testing
Stand-Alone Router
A stand-alone router is one that is not connected to a network and (presumably) has a captive panel
mounted on the front.
The router’s rotary switch must be set to a value in the range [1–4].
S The panel will power up in the locked state. The ‘Panel Lock’ button will be red. Just press the
red button to clear the lock.
1 Ensure that the router has power. Either or both of the power indicator LEDs should be on.
If that is not the case, then check the power indicator LED of the router’s power supply and
check the connectors of the power supply’s cables. Replace the power supply if it is defective.
You might want to use the power supply strap to help the line cable secure. See Power Cord
Retention on page 149.
2 Examine the captive panel. Are all the source and destination buttons illuminated?
3 Perform one or more takes using the panel. (Press a destination button followed by a source
button.)
You do not need to connect any devices to a router to see whether it switches. Button status on
the control panel reflects the router’s state. However, connected devices will give you visual
and auditory feedback regarding the quality of the switched signals.
4 Perform a panel lock. Press the panel lock button and it should turn red. (When the panel is
locked, other buttons are disabled.)
5 Perform a destination lock. Press a destination then press the ‘Destination Lock’ button. Both
buttons should turn red. Press the ‘Destination Lock’ button again. Both buttons should revert
to amber.
6 Exactly one of the level selection buttons should be bright. (There are 4 buttons, corresponding
to the level you selected with the rotary switch.)

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 53

3. Installation
Testing

If the router and panel pass all of these simple tests, it is likely to be working properly. You can now
proceed with I/O connections and more exhaustive and detailed testing that is dependent only your
installation.
Report any failures to Miranda customer service.

Stand-Alone Network
A stand-alone network comprises 1–4 routers, one or more control panels, and an Ethernet switch.
If you have an automation system, the panels are not strictly required, but are helpful for testing.
The network can include captive and remote panels. It should include a PC on which you can run
CRSC. (CRSC, although not used with a stand-alone network, can provide a better view of stand-
alone routers and panels and can be used for firmware updates.)
S If you are using devices that were previously used in a CRSC network, you must restore them
to their factory-default states. To do that, turn the rotary switches to position 0 and cycle power.
Then turn the rotary switches to different non-zero positions and proceed to make network con-
nections.
1 First ensure that all your routers and remote panels have power and are functioning.
2 Ensure that each router has a unique rotary switch setting in the range 1–4. The switch position
determines the router’s level.
3 Ensure that each remote panel module has a unique rotary switch setting in the range 1–15.
(The letters A–F represent the values 10–15.)
4 Connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Use CAT5 Ethernet cable or better. Verify that the
switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should see both green and amber
communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the routers and remote panel modules.
5 If your panels are mounted, they should power up with their panel lock button high-tally red
and all source and destination buttons illuminated (low-tally). Turn panel lock off if you wish to
operate a panel.
6 Level buttons should be high-tally for each level in the network. Each source and each destina-
tion button should be illuminated — and high tally when selected.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

Further Testing
Perform a few multi-level takes and locks. See Chapter 5, Operation, for instructions.
Report failures to Miranda customer service.

CRSC Network
A CRSC network comprises one or more routers (up to 8 levels), one or more remote panels, and an
Ethernet switch. If you have an automation or control system, the panels are not strictly required,
but are helpful for testing.
The network should not include captive panels. It must include a PC on which you can run CRSC.
(CRSC is a requirement for creating a CRSC network.)
1 First ensure that all your routers and remote panels have power and are functioning.

54 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Testing

2 Connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Use CAT5 Ethernet cable or better. Verify that the
switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should see both green and amber
communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the routers and remote panel modules.
3 Follow the steps for initial setup as described in the CRSC User’s Guide. This ensures that all
routers and remote panel modules on your network are properly connected.
To confirm that you have done this, choose the ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ page and examine
the list of devices. All devices in your network should be present in the list with the IP
addresses that you have chosen.
4 In CRSC, choose the ‘Firmware Update’ page and upload current firmware to all routers and
remote panel modules. It takes about 2–3 minutes per device.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

Simple Testing with CRSC

Because CRSC requires at least some configuration of your routers and panels and because CRSC
networks involve a considerable amount of design, it is not possible to present a definite procedure
for testing your network. You may consider the following guidelines.
1 Examine your router levels carefully in the ‘Set Up Router Levels’ page.
Ensure that there are 8 or fewer levels and that the partition types and partition ranges reflect
your design goals.
It is easy to forget that adding a router adds a level. If you already have 8 levels and add a
router, CRSC allows it and you now have 9 levels. One level must be deleted. (You cannot sim-
ple delete the level created by the router you just added. You must remove the router from the
network.)
Make sure that the added router’s level number is correct for your design.
2 Ensure that any AES router has video reference if it is required and that the partition type is
chosen appropriately.
You can test the operation of an AES router — or any router — in the ‘View Crosspoint’ page.
3 Ensure that any machine control router partition is set to ‘machine control reverse’. Other parti-
tion types are allowed, but not yet implemented.
4 Panel configuration is fairly easy but can become complex if your system is complex. Be aware
of the differences between panel operating modes.

Further Testing
Perform a few multi-level takes and locks. See the CRSC User’s Guide for more information.
Report failures to Miranda customer service.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 55

3. Installation
Testing

CQX Routers
A CQX system is restricted: one CQX router and one captive CQX panel and optionally a remote
CQX panel. If you have an automation system, the panel is not strictly required, but helpful for test-
ing. Your CQX router and panel might be on a network that includes a PC on which you can run
CRSC.
1 First ensure that your router and panel have power and are functioning.
2 Ensure that the router and remote panel module (if you have one) have non-zero rotary switch
settings for the frame ID.
3 Ensure that the router has the ‘Mode’ rotary switch set for the correct video rate. See Mode
Rotary Switch on page 68 for details.
4 (Optionally) connect your video reference at this time. It takes about 10 seconds for the router
to lock to the reference. You can wait until you have I/Os connected before connecting a video
reference. You will not be able to perform any useful tests until the reference and at least some
I/Os are connected.
5 If you have a network, connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Use CAT5 Ethernet cable
or better. Verify that the switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should
see both green and amber communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the router (and
remote panel module).
6 Your panel should power up with its panel lock button high-tally red and all source and destina-
tion buttons illuminated (low-tally). Turn panel lock off.

Basic Functions
Assuming a CQX panel is connected to the CQX router:
1 Press one or more destination buttons. Do the buttons change state (go high- or low-tally)?
2 Press one or more transition type buttons. Do the buttons change state (go high- or low-tally)?
(You must have pressed one of the two CQ outputs for the transition type and rate buttons to be
enabled.)
3 Press one or more transition rate buttons. Do the buttons change state (go high- or low-tally)?
4 Press one of the 2 CQX outputs, then press a source button other than the source that was
already selected. Does a transition occur according to the transition type and rate you have
selected? (You will need a monitor connected to the CQX outputs for this test.)
A clean and quiet transition occurs only if the video input formats match the ‘Mode’ switch set-
ting and a valid video reference is connected.
5 Choose a different transition rate or type, then repeat step 4. Does a transition occur according
to the transition type and rate you have selected? (You will need a monitor connected to the
CQX outputs for this test too.)
6 Press one of the 6 auxiliary outputs, then press a source button other than the source that was
already selected. Does a transition occur (without any transition effects)?
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

56 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 3. Installation
Testing

Bypass Functions
This does not assume that a CQX panel is connected to the CQX router. It does assume that a mon-
itor is connected to one or both of the 2 CQX outputs.
1 Ensure that a video source is connected to the ‘Bypass 1’ BNC.
2 Route a video source to the ‘CQX 1’ output.
3 Remove power. The monitor should switch to the source from the bypass input.
4 Repeat steps 1–3 for CQX 2 and ‘Bypass 2’.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

GPIO Functions
Each of the 16 GP inputs switch a corresponding video input to CQ output 1. The 4 GP outputs sig-
nal alarms and status. See GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers on page 95 for
details.

Using CRSC for Testing

You can use CRSC to view the CQX crosspoint. CRSC presents a 16×8 crosspoint matrix that you
can use to perform takes directly and to view takes and locks performed at a CQX panel.
You can also use CRSC to perform (destination) lock maintenance.

NV9000 Network
An NV9000 network includes one or more compact routers (up to 8 router partitions, or levels), one
or more remote panels acting as NV9000 panels, and an Ethernet switch for each panel/router net-
work and possibly an Ethernet switch for the house net or config net to which you configuration PC
is connected. The NV9000 network might include large routers and NV96xx control panels and
other equipment, but that equipment is not the concern of this guide.
The NV9000 network might center around an NV9000 system controller or a NV915 system con-
troller. The NV9000 network might also include automation.
The network allows captive panels but does not include them (although they do show the status of
the routers on which they are mounted).
Use these guidelines to test your network:
1 First ensure that all your routers and remote panels have power and are functioning.
2 Verify that the Ethernet switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should
see both green and amber communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the routers and
remote panel modules.
3 Follow the steps for initial setup as described in the CRSC User’s Guide. This ensures that all
routers and remote panel modules on your network are properly connected.
To confirm that you have done this, choose the ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ page in CRSC and
examine the list of devices. All devices in your network should be present in the list with the IP
addresses that you have chosen.
You can perform similar tests in the ‘System’ pane (and pages) of NV9000-SE Utilities.
4 If necessary, choose the ‘Firmware Update’ page in CRSC and upload current firmware to all
routers and remote panel modules. It takes about 2–3 minutes per device.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 57

3. Installation
Testing

Simple Testing with CRSC

NV9000 networks that use compact routers require some setup in CRSC. (Other NVISION series
routers require some setup in UniConfig. It is the same idea.) The principal use of CRSC is (a) to
assign IP addresses to all the routers and remote panel modules and (b) to specify the router parti-
tions (aka levels). This use of CRSC in an NV9000 network is no different from the setup required
by a CRSC network. A third function is to change all remote panel modules to NV9000 mode.
1 Examine your router levels carefully in the ‘Set Up Router Levels’ page.
Ensure that there are 8 or fewer levels and that the partition types and partition ranges reflect
your design goals.
Make sure the level numbers are correct. You will entered much of this level information in
NV9000-SE Utilities. The information in CRSC and NV9000-SE Utilities should match.
2 Ensure that any AES router has video reference if it is required and that the partition type is
chosen appropriately.
3 Test the operation of any router in the ‘View Crosspoint’ page of CRSC.
4 Ensure that any machine control router partition is set to ‘machine control reverse’. Other parti-
tion types are allowed, but not yet implemented.
5 Perform a few multi-level takes and locks. See the CRSC User’s Guide for more information.

Simple Testing under NV9000

1 Use the ‘System’ pages of NV9000-SE Utilities to examine, start, stop, or otherwise manage
your NV9000 network.
You will see the routers and panels of your network and their status in these pages.
Verify that all your compact routers and remote panels are present and that their status is
“good.” You might have to correct IP addresses in CRSC or in NV9000-SE Utilities and possi-
bly restart your NV9000 software.
2 Press a few panel buttons. Do they work? Chances are that if any button works, they all work
(subject to the correctness of your configuration and the suitability of your network design).
You can correct panel configuration errors at any time. You must rewrite the configuration to
the NV9000 when you do so.
Report failures to Miranda customer service.

58 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

4. Configuration

Chapter 4 provides configuration instructions for the CR Series products. It presents these topics:
• Stand-Alone Routers
• Stand-Alone Network
• CRSC Network
• Router Control Systems
• CQX Routers

Summary
There are several general ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 or NV915 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel and optionally a remote CQX panel.

Stand-Alone Routers
A stand-alone router has very little to configure. This is what you can control:
• The number of power sources: 1 or 2.
• The physical input and output connections.
• The video reference.

The Number of Power Sources

You can connect one or two external power supplies. The second power supply provides redun-
dancy protection if the first malfunctions.
Follow these steps to connect a power supply:
1 Plug the 4-pin connector on the power supply into the 4-pin connector (PS1 or PS2) on the
router. There is only one way that it will fit. Do not force it.
2 Plug the AC cord into the other end of the power supply “brick” and then plug the AC plug into
an AC power outlet. There is no on/off switch.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 59

4. Configuration
Stand-Alone Routers

The Physical Inputs and Output Connections

Connect input devices and output devices to the router according to the requirements of your sys-
tem and according to the connector types for the particular router(s) you have.
S Video cable length limits are standard: 400m for SD, 150m for HD, and 100m for 3Gig (80 m
for 3Gig CQX routers), for Belden 1694A (or equivalent) cable. Input equalization is automati-
cally adjusted according to that cable type and cable length. Audio cable limits are about 100 m.
S Miranda offers a breakout cable (WC0053) for DB25 connectors.
S Some devices connected to a machine control router have DE9 connectors. If you have such
devices, you must create your own RJ45-to-DE9 cables for machine control routers. See
Cabling on page 146.

External Video Reference

All routers except the machine control routers accept bi-level or tri-level video references and
switch according to SMPTE RP168-2002. The machine control routers do not receive video refer-
ence.
Unless you want asynchronous mode with an AES router, use an external video reference. AES
routers require a video reference to operate in synchronous mode.
Connect your video reference input to either video reference connector on the rear of the router.
Use the other video reference connector to feed the reference signal to another device. Terminate
the reference signal (or chain of reference signals) using a 75Ω terminator.

The Rotary Switch

A single stand-alone router does not use its 16-position rotary switch setting (useful only in a net-
work) but you should set it to a non-zero position in any case. (When the rotary switch is zero, the
router reverts to its factory-default state at power-up.)
When a control panel is mounted on a router, it conceals the rotary switch. You must remove the
control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
S Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

Button Legends
You can label the control panel buttons. Use a desktop publishing program to create your own but-
ton legends. The legends should be transparent and no larger than 0.40″× 0.40″ (10mm square). A
3/8″ (9.5mm) square insert will allow a little clearance. The clear plastic material used for overhead
transparencies is suitable for printing legends.
To apply a label to a button, pull the clear plastic cap from the button, insert the label in the cap, and
replace the cap. The caps come off easily. No tools are required. We recommend that you not use
adhesive.
S Button legend templates (in Word,® Illustrator,® and Freehand ® formats) are available on the
Compact Router documentation and software disk you received with your CR Series prod-
uct(s). Simply type (or draw) the legends you want and print the page on transparent film.

60 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 4. Configuration
Stand-Alone Network

Stand-Alone Network
For each router, set up I/O, video reference, and power and ground connections as you would for
stand-alone routers.
Similarly, for each remote panel module, set up power and ground connections. Attach a matching
control panel to each. See Stand-Alone Routers, the previous section, for information.

IP Addresses and Levels

A stand-alone network allows up to 4 routers (levels 1–4) and up to 15 remote panel modules.
Decide what signal types (HD, SD, AES, AV, etc.) you want on which levels and set the rotary
switch position to configure the levels accordingly. For routers, the switch positions must be 1, 2, 3,
or 4.
To configure the IP addresses of remote panel modules, set the rotary switch to a non-zero position.
Each remote panel module is treated identically on the network, so the rotary switch positions are
immaterial as long as they are all distinct.
If you are using CRConfig, the PC(s) on which CRConfig executes must be on the same subnet.
Make sure that each PC’s IP address is [Link], where xxx is not the subnet address of any
router or remote panel module. We suggest any address outside the ranges 101–104 and 51–65.
See Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Networks, on page 44, for information on rotary
switch settings and subnet addresses.
S You can use CRConfig to perform a quick check to see whether your network is connected
properly. Click ‘Find CR Family Routers’ to scan your network for CR Series routers and
remote panel modules. Everything connected to your network should appear in CRConfig’s
Devices list.

CRSC Network
For each router, set up I/O, video reference, and power and ground connections as you would for
stand-alone routers.
Similarly, for each remote panel module, set up power and ground connections. Attach a matching
control panel to each.

IP Addresses and Levels

A CRSC network allows up to 4 routers, 8 router levels and up to 16 remote panel modules. Decide
what signal types (HD, SD, AES, AV, etc.) you want on which levels.
Rotary switches must be unique for routers initially. Then, use CRSC to assign IP addresses that do
not depend on the rotary switches. Also use CRSC to assign level numbers that do not depend on
the rotary switches.
Rotary switches must be unique for remote panel modules initially. Use CRSC to assign IP
addresses that do not depend on the rotary switches.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 61

4. Configuration
Router Control Systems

See Levels and IP Addresses in CRSC Networks, on page 45, for information on rotary switch set-
tings and subnet addresses.
S You can use CRSC to perform a quick check to see whether your network is connected prop-
erly. Choose ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ to scan your network for CR Series routers and
remote panel modules. All your devices should appear in the list on that configuration page.
Beyond these rudiments, CRSC network configuration is beyond the scope of this document and
depends largely on your design goals. Read about in the CRSC User’s Guide.

Router Control Systems

An NV9000 system can include compact routers and remote panel modules on its networks. The
(active) NV9000 controller is the focus of the system. It controls everything according to opera-
tions performed at NV96xx panels and CR Series remote panels.
Your remote panel modules must be set up for NV9000 and subsequently configured in NV9000-
SE Utilities. (They can be converted back to CRSC.) It is generally required to use CRSC to set up
the initial IP addresses of the remote panel modules and routers and the levels within routers.
After the initial setup is done, use NV9000-SE Utilities to configure the routers and remote panel
modules.

Remote Panel Modules

Every remote panel module in an NV9000 network must be configured in CRSC to operate under
NV9000. Use the ‘Setup NV9000 Remote Panel’ page:

Follow these steps:

1 Select the remote panel module (i.e., a frame) in the table in the lower part of the page.
2 Check the ‘Enable NV9000 Mode’ box.
3 Check the ‘Use DHCP ...’ box if you want the NV9000 to use DHCP to assign an IP address to
the remote panel. We recommend you check this box.
4 The default panel ID (an NV9000 feature) is derived from the lower 16 bits of the remote
panel’s IP address as defined in CRSC. You can change the panel ID. Panel IDs under NV9000
must be unique.

62 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 4. Configuration
Router Control Systems

5 Click the ‘Update Remote Panel’ button to commit your changes.

If you want to revert a panel, uncheck the ‘Enable NV9000 Mode’ box and press ‘Update Remote
Panel’
S Regardless of the terminology you might see on the page, this page affects remote panel mod-
ules and not routers and not control panels.

Router Configurations
NV9000-SE Utilities requires you to enumerate your compact routers. From the ‘Routers’ page,
click ‘Add Router’. The router definition require ‘NV Compact Router Ethernet’ protocol.
After you add the router, you may specify its IP address, physical levels, and other characteristics.
This figure shows an typical router configuration. It is the AES router used in the NV9000 Network
Example on page 135:

The IP address and the physical levels you specify here must match the IP address and the levels
you defined in CRSC. (CRSC allows up 8 levels.)
Click ‘Save’ to capture your configuration.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 63

4. Configuration
Router Control Systems

Virtual Levels
You must decide what signal types (HD, SD, AES, AV, etc.) you want on which levels.
An NV9000 network relies on CRSC to define Compact Router partitions (levels) as it relies on
UniConfig to define the partitions of other NVISION series routers. If your system is to work prop-
erly, you must define virtual levels in NV9000-SE Utilities that match the levels defined in CRSC.
To do that, you must create at least one level set. It is often sufficient to define a single level set in
NV9000-SE Utilities that includes all levels.
Go to the ‘Level Sets’ page and click ‘Add Level’.
This level set matches the NV9000 Network Example on page 135:

To create a virtual level, click the ‘Add Level’ button in the ‘Virtual Levels’ region.
In this example, the level set includes one SD level, and two AES levels. The physical levels are
defined when you define the routers.
Each virtual level is defined by some physical level. The virtual levels must match, in number and
type, those you have defined in CRSC. Their names in NV9000-SE Utilities may differ. The exam-
ple above matches these CRSC levels:

Do not forget to click the ‘Save’ button.

64 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 4. Configuration
Router Control Systems

(The rotary switches on compact routers are of concern only during initial setup in CRSC.)
(1) When a compact router’s rotary switch is at position 0, it will reset to its factory default state at
power up. That is useful at times, but once you have set up a router in CRSC, you want to avoid
position 0.
(2) The rotary switch when it is non-zero defines the router’s default level and its IP address. Once
you have defined partitions for the router (and have redefined the router’s IP address), the position
of the rotary switch no longer matters.
NV9000 configuration, therefore, does not involve a compact router’s rotary switch.

I/O Connections
At some point you will have decided where your I/Os connect. Use the ‘Devices’ or ‘Add Multiple
Devices’ in NV9000-SE Utilities to enumerate I/O connections.
Configuring I/Os in NV9000-SE Utilities is outside the scope of this guide. This page is the result,
in the NV9000 Network Example on page 135, of making I/O connections.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 65

4. Configuration
Router Control Systems

Panel Configurations
NV9000-SE Utilities allows you to configure RP16s and RP32s as panels.
This shows an RP16 configuration that matches the NV9000 Network Example on page 135:

Button Functions
Any button on the panel can have one of these functions.
• Source
A source button represents a source device (which is generally a set of inputs in the NV9000
network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.
When you make a button a source button and it is selected, a drop-down menu of sources
appears. The name of the source appears on the button in the configuration page.
• Destination
A destination button represents a destination device (which is generally a set of outputs in the
NV9000 network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.
When you make a button a destination button and it is selected, a drop-down menu of destina-
tions appears. The name of the destination appears on the button in the configuration page.
• Salvo
In the context of CR Series remote panels, a salvo is system salvo (as opposed to any other
kind). A system salvo is a stored set of NV9000 commands, such as Take, Lock, Release, or
Pause, that executes when the salvo button is pressed.
When you make a button a salvo button and it is selected, a drop-down menu of system salvos
appears. The name of the salvo appears on the button in the configuration page.
You can define system salvos in NV9000-SE Utilities.
• Previous Source
A ‘Previous Source’ button is like an “undo” button: when you press it, the connection to the
source previously routed to a destination is restored.

66 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 4. Configuration
CQX Routers

• Undefined.
Some remote panel buttons can be left undefined. These buttons do nothing.
A remote panel under NV9000 is not quite the same as CRSC. The panel has no lock buttons of any
kind.

Special Functions
At the right side of the configuration page, there are two drop-down lists:
• Default destination.
The default destination is a destination selected for the panel at power-up. That destination
remains selected until an operator selects another destination at the panel.
Because of the default destination, the panel could conceivably function as 32×1 panel. Without
a default destination, at least one destination button is required.
• Status Monitor.
The status monitor is a destination device (such as a video monitor) on which the output(s) of
the currently selected destination are replicated. When you select a different destination, the sta-
tus monitor output reflects that change. When you select a different source for a destination, the
status monitor output reflects that change also.

References
Refer to NV9000 Router Control Systems on page 142 for information about configuring an
NV9000 system.
NV9000-SE Utilities is the configuration software used with the NV9000 and NV915. Please refer
to the NV9000-SE Utilities online documentation or to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide.

CQX Routers
At present, a CQX router, like a stand-alone router, has very little to configure:
• The video format.
• The frame ID.
• The number of power sources: 1 or 2.
• The physical input and output connections.
• The video reference.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 67

4. Configuration
CQX Routers

Mode Rotary Switch

The ‘Mode’ rotary switch configures the router’s video format.
Set this 16-position rotary switch to a position in the range 0–5 according to this table:
Setting Format
0 1080i, 59.94
1 1080i, 50
2 525i 59.94
3 625i, 50
4 720p, 59.94
5 720p, 50
6 1080p, 59.94 (SMPTE 425 level A)
7 1080p, 50 (SMPTE 425 level A)
8 2 × 1080i, 59.94 (SMPTE 425 level B)
9 2 × 1080i, 50 (SMPTE 425 level B)

The default is 1080i, 59.94 Hz (switch setting 0).

S When a control panel is mounted on a router or remote panel module, it conceals the rotary
switch. You must remove the control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
S Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

Frame ID Rotary Switch

Set the router’s 16-position ‘Frame ID’ rotary switch to a position from 1 to 4. Do not use position
0. (When the rotary switch is zero, the router reverts to its factory-default state at power-up.)
If you have a remote panel, set the remote panel module’s 16-position rotary switch to a non-zero
position. (When the rotary switch is zero, the remote panel module also reverts to its factory-default
state at power-up.)
S When a control panel is mounted on a router or remote panel module, it conceals the rotary
switch. You must remove the control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
S Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.
The rotary switch determines the IP address of the router or remote panel module. You can change
the IP address(es) in CRSC.

The Number of Power Sources

You can connect one or two external power supplies. The second power supply provides redun-
dancy protection if the first malfunctions.
Follow these steps to connect a power supply:
1 Plug the 4-pin connector on the power supply into the 4-pin connector (PS1 or PS2) on the
router. There is only one way that it will fit. Do not force it.
2 Plug the AC cord into the other end of the power supply “brick” and then plug the AC plug into
an AC power outlet. There is no on/off switch.

The Physical Inputs and Output Connections

Connect input devices and output devices to the router according to the requirements of your sys-
tem and according to the connector types for the particular router(s) you have. Keep in mind that

68 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 4. Configuration
CQX Routers

there are 16 normal video inputs, 2 bypass video inputs, 2 CQX outputs, and 6 auxiliary (normal)
video outputs. All inputs and outputs use BNCs.
S Video cable length limits are standard: 400m for SD, 150m for HD, and 100m for 3Gig (80 m
for 3Gig CQX routers), for Belden 1694A (or equivalent) cable. Input equalization is automati-
cally adjusted according to that cable type and cable length.

External Video Reference

The CR1602-SD-CQX accepts composite (NTSC or PAL) reference. The other two CQX routers
accept either composite or tri-level video reference. All switch according to SMPTE RP168-2002.
Connect your video reference input to either video reference connector on the rear of the router.
Terminate the reference signal (or chain of reference signals) using a 75Ω terminator on the other
reference connector.

Button Legends
The buttons are pre-labeled at the factory, but you can create labels of your own. Use a desktop
publishing program to create your own button legends. The legends should be transparent and no
larger than 0.40″× 0.40″ (10mm square). A 3/8″ (9.5mm) square insert will allow a little clearance.
The clear plastic material used for overhead transparencies is suitable for printing legends.
To apply a label to a button, pull the clear plastic cap from the button, insert the label in the cap, and
replace the cap. The caps come off easily. No tools are required. We recommend that you not use
adhesive.
S Button legend templates (in Word,® Illustrator,® and Freehand ® formats) are available on the
Compact Router documentation and software disk you received with your CR Series prod-
uct(s). Simply type (or draw) the legends you want and print the page on transparent film.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 69

4. Configuration
CQX Routers

70 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

5. Operation

Chapter 5 provides operating instructions for the CR Series products. It presents these topics:
• Stand-Alone Router
• Stand-Alone Network
• CRSC Networks
• Router Control Systems
• CQX Router

Summary
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 or NV915 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
See the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information about operating a CRSC network.

Stand-Alone Router
A “stand-alone” router is one operated independently with an attached CR Series control panel. (It
is possible to control the router using an third-party automation system but this document does not
address automation.)

Startup
To power up a router, connect the 4-pin connector the power supply to PS1 or PS2. Then plug the
power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two power supplies for redundancy,
connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, the router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its previous
operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and outputs and which of
the outputs are locked.)
S If a router’s rotary switch is set to the 0 position, the router reverts to the factory-default state,
not its previous state.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 71

5. Operation
Stand-Alone Router

At power-up, the router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal. The AES rout-
ers start in asynchronous mode, but switch almost instantly to synchronous mode if a video refer-
ence is present.
At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn Panel Lock off before
you can use the panel.
At power-up, a control panel lights one of its level buttons, if the rotary switch of the router beneath
it is set to a value in the range 1–4. If the rotary switch is set otherwise, the control panel does not
light any level button. In any case, all level buttons are inoperable. For a stand-alone router, level
selection is disabled.

Takes
Except for the number of buttons, performing takes is identical on all control panels.1 To perform a
take, first press a DST button and then a SRC button. The take occurs immediately.
When you press the DST button, it tallies high (amber). The button for the source that corresponds
to the selected DST also tallies high (green). When you press a SRC button, the old connection is
lost, the old SRC button goes low tally, and the new SRC button goes high tally.
S Example: you want to route input 4 (VTR2) to output 5 (monitor). The monitor is presently
connected to input 3 (VTR1).
• Press the DST 5 button. It goes high tally. SRC 3, the current source, does also.

Source VTR
1
VTR
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Dest MON

• Press the SRC 4 (VTR2) button. The SRC 3 button goes low tally and the SRC 4 button goes
high.

Source VTR
1
VTR
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Dest MON

Pressing another DST button starts a new route.

S If a destination is locked, it will be low-tally red. If you press its button, it will go high-tally red.
You cannot perform a take for a destination that is locked. See Locks.

Machine Control Takes

The method for performing a machine control take is the same as for any other compact router: first
press a DST button and then a SRC button. However, for machine control routers, the intrinsic
nature of the take is different and the effects on the control panel are different:
1 A machine control router is a point-to-point router whereas the other compact routers are X/Y
routers. In an X/Y router, a source can be routed to multiple destinations. In a machine control
router, a new route breaks all previous connections to the source and all previous connections to
the destination prior to making the new connection.
2 Port router connections are bidirectional. A port is both an input and an output. Thus, if you
take SRC1 to DST6, SRC6 is also connected to DST1.

1. A CP3201 cannot be used with a stand-alone router.

72 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 5. Operation
Stand-Alone Router

For dynamic ports, there is a difference between taking DST 6/SRC 1 and taking DST 1/SRC 6.
DST 1/SRC 6 Port 1 is “controlling.” Port 6 is “controlled.”
DST 6/SRC 1 Port 6 is “controlling.” Port 1 is “controlled.”
Thus, it is the destination that is “controlling.” That is because compact machine control routers
are “data reverse.”
3 Internally, the router might change a dynamic port from controlled to controlling or vice versa.
See Machine Control Routers (page 15) for a description of port types.
S Machine control takes do not start, stop, rewind, or cue any machines, nor do they pre-roll or
position any media.

Locks
The 1RU panel has 6 function buttons. The 2RU panel has 12 function buttons. In all cases, two of
the function buttons are locks, four are level buttons. Any other buttons are reserved for future use.
Destination Lock Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

16

S Buttons are not labeled at the factory. You must create your own labels. See Button Legends on
page 60.

Panel Lock
Pressing Panel Lock disables the control panel. Only the Panel Lock button remains enabled. Press-
ing it again reenables the control panel.
Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

When the control panel is locked, the lock button is bright red and the state of the entire control
panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The panel lock button is low tally
green when the control panelDestination
is not locked.
Lock

Destination Lock
Destination lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. To lock a
destination, press the destination button, then press Destination Lock. This sample shows DST 5
locked to SRC 3:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Locked Destination
The Destination Lock button immediately goes high tally red and the current source and destination
are high tally, with the destination button red. Changes to that destination are disabled. If you sub-
sequently press a destination button that is locked, the button goes high tally (red), its source goes
high tally (green) and the Destination Lock button goes high tally, as this sample shows.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 73

5. Operation
Stand-Alone Network

Changes to other destinations are, however, enabled, and specifically, you can route the source that
feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.
After you select another (unlocked) destination, the locked destination goes low tally red. This
illustration shows DST 1 selected and DST 5 locked. Because DST 1 is not locked, the Destination
Lock button is low tally amber.
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Selected Destination Locked Destination

To unlock a destination, press the destination button and then press Destination Lock (again). The
destination button reverts to amber and the Destination Lock button goes low tally. This illustration
shows DST 5 selected and no longer locked:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Stand-Alone Network
A stand-alone network includes 1–4 routers, at least one remote panel module (up to 15), and an
Ethernet switch. A remote panel module, to be useful, must have a control panel2 attached. (This
document does not address automation.)
A PC running configuration software can optionally be connected to the network.

Startup
To power up a router or a remote panel module, connect the 4-pin connector the power supply to
PS1 or PS2. Then plug the power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two
power supplies for redundancy, connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, a router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its previous
operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and outputs and which of
the outputs are locked.)
At power-up, a router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal. The AES routers
switch to synchronous mode if a video reference is present.
At power-up, routers and remote panel modules “discover” the presence and state of the routers in
the network.
S It might be convenient to connect all your CR Series power supplies to a power bus that you can
switch on and off. A fully populated network requires 20 power supplies (or up to 40 if you are
providing redundant power). Under normal operation, a fully populated network draws less
than 3A at 120VAC.

2. A CP3201 cannot be used in a stand-alone network.

74 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 5. Operation
Stand-Alone Network

At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn Panel Lock off before
you can use the panel. This is true whether the control panel is mounted on a router or a remote
panel module.
At power-up, a control panel mounted on a remote panel module lights a subset of its level buttons,
depending on the levels selected at each of the routers in the network. There are 4 situations to con-
sider:
1 If there is one router (level in the range 1–4), one level button is illuminated but is inoperable
because, with one level, level selection is not possible.
2 If there is no router whose level is in the range 1–4, no level button is illuminated and all are
inoperable. The network routers are configured in error and inaccessible.
3 There are from 1 to 4 routers whose levels are distinct and in the range 1–4. The level buttons
that correspond to the levels of the routers are illuminated and operable.
4 There are from 1 to 4 routers whose levels are not distinct in the range 1–4. The level buttons
that correspond to the levels of the routers are illuminated and operable. However, the router
network will misbehave in unpredictable ways.

Level Selection
A video or audio device typically receives or transmits signals of several types. A VTR might han-
dle HD, SD, AES, and machine control signals that need to be switched simultaneously. The differ-
ent signal types are considered “levels” in a router network.
In a compact router network, multiple levels can be taken to a destination simultaneously (in a sin-
gle button press).
In a compact router network, multiple levels of a destination can be locked simultaneously (again,
in a single button press).

Example
Two levels, SD and AES, are taken from the VTR to the monitor:
HD Routers
SD SD
AES 1 AES
VTR MON
2

Remote Panel Module

The four level buttons on a control panel correspond to the four router levels, with level 1 on the
left and level 4 on the right.
(Destination Lock) (Panel Lock)

1 2 3 4

Levels

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 75

5. Operation
Stand-Alone Network

A level button is lit in amber if a router at that level is present in the network. A level button is
high-tally when the level is selected and low-tally when not.

Exceptions
In most cases, the level buttons are toggles: press the level button to select the level, press the but-
ton again to deselect the level. However, there is an exception: when you have selected all the lev-
els in your network, pressing any level button deselects the other levels and leaves the one you
pressed selected.
Another exception is when you have only one router in your network. Pressing the level selection
button has no effect. The single router is always selected.

Takes
A network of routers is capable of multi-level takes. Multi-level takes are issued at a remote panel
module. Local (single-level) takes can be issued through the crosspoint displayed in CRConfig.
Follow these steps to perform a multi-level take:
1 Press the level buttons on a remote panel module to select the levels for the take. Be aware of
the level selection exceptions, listed under Exceptions in the previous section. Selected levels
show high-tally amber.
2 Press a destination button on the remote panel module to choose a destination.
3 Press a source button on the remote panel module to route the source to the chosen destination.
The take is complete. A routing switch occurs on each level you selected at the remote panel mod-
ule. If you are monitoring the network with CRConfig, you can view the results of the take in
CRConfig’s crosspoint image.

Machine Control Takes

Performing machine control takes is the same in a stand-alone network as for standalone routers.
See Machine Control Takes (page 72).
However, in a network that includes machine control router(s), operators must be aware of the dif-
ference between machine control routers and other routers (video and audio).
Machine control routers are point-to-point and other routers are X/Y. Creating a point-to-point con-
nection breaks any connections previously made to the source and to the destination. In a video or
audio router, prior connections are not generally broken: you can route a source to multiple destina-
tions.
In a network that includes machine control routers, you might wish to switch video and audio levels
separately from machine control levels.
S Machine control takes do not start, stop, rewind, or cue machines, nor do they pre-roll or posi-
tion any media.

Locks
Performing locks in a network is almost the same as performing locks in a stand-alone system.
However, please note:
• A panel lock performed at a remote panel module locks the remote panel module’s control
panel only.

76 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 5. Operation
Stand-Alone Network

• A destination lock performed at a remote panel module locks a destination on all selected lev-
els. The lock state of a destination is not changed on unselected levels.
If all the selected levels of a destination are locked, the destination button is red. If some of the
selected levels of a destination are unlocked, the destination button is amber.
• A destination locked at one control panel (on a router or remote panel module) cannot be
unlocked at another control panel.
S Be sure to unlock any locks before removing a panel from a network!
As previously stated, two of the function buttons are locks and four are level buttons. (Any other
function buttons are reserved for future use.)
Destination Lock Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

LVL
1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4 Level selection buttons

This illustration shows a system that has 3 levels (1–3), two of which are selected. Buttons for
selected levels are high-tally. The button for (non-existent) level 4 is unlit.
S Buttons are not labeled at the factory. You must create your own labels. See Button Legends on
page 60.

Panel Lock
Pressing Panel Lock disables the control panel on the remote panel module where you press Panel
Lock. Only the Panel Lock button remains enabled. Pressing it again reenables the control panel.
Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

LVL LVL LVL LVL

1 2 3 4

When the control panel is locked, the Panel Lock button is bright red and the state of the entire con-
trol panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The Panel Lock button is low
tally green when the control panel is not locked.
S Remember that a Panel Lock button locks that panel only. It does not lock a router, a remote
panel module, other control panels, or the network.

Destination Lock
Destination Lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. In a net-
work, sources and destinations comprise one or more levels. When you lock a destination, it is
locked on the levels you select.
To lock a destination, first press level buttons on a remote panel module (or local panel) to select
the intended levels. These illustrations show a system that has 3 levels (1–3), two of which are
selected. Buttons for selected levels are high-tally.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 77

5. Operation
CRSC Networks

After selecting levels, press a destination button on the remote panel module, then press Destina-
tion Lock. This sample shows SRC 3 locked to DST 5 on levels 2 and 3, but not level 1:
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON LVL

1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4

Locked Destination
The Destination Lock button immediately goes high tally red and the current source and destination
go high tally, with the destination button red. Changes to that destination are disabled on all
selected levels. If you subsequently press a destination button that is locked, the button goes high
tally (red), its source goes high tally (green) and the Destination Lock button goes high tally, as this
sample shows.
Changes to other destinations are, however, enabled, and specifically, you can route the source that
feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.
Changes to unselected levels for that destination remain enabled. In these examples, level 1 is unse-
lected and therefore, you can route to device 5 on level 1.
After you select another (unlocked) destination, the locked destination goes low tally red. This
illustration shows DST 1 selected and DST 5 locked. Because DST 1 is not locked, the Destination
Lock button is low tally amber.
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON LVL

1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4

Selected Destination Locked Destination

To unlock a destination, press the destination button on the remote panel module and then press
Destination Lock (again). The destination button reverts to amber and the Destination Lock button
goes low tally. This illustration shows DST 5 selected and no longer locked:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON LVL

1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4

A destination button on a remote panel module will be red (high-tally if selected, low tally if not)
when all of its levels are locked and selected.
Selecting or deselecting a level does not affect the signals being routed on that level. Nor does
pressing a destination button or either of the lock buttons. It is only when you press a source button
(effecting a take) that the signals are changed.

CRSC Networks
Operation of a CRSC network can vary from very simple to very complex. There are many options
and many factors to consider.
Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information.

78 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 5. Operation
Router Control Systems

Router Control Systems

In an NV9000 system, it is the (active) NV9000 system controller that is the focus. Remote panels
are relatively simple panels under NV9000. Their function set includes these buttons:
• Source
A source button represents a source device (which provides a set of inputs to the NV9000 net-
work. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.
• Destination
A destination button represents a destination device (which comprises a set of outputs in the
NV9000 network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.
• Salvo
In the context of CR Series remote panels, a salvo is system salvo (as opposed to any other
kind). A system salvo is a stored set of NV9000 commands, such as Take, Lock, Release, or
Pause, that executes when the salvo button is pressed.
System salvos are defined in NV9000-SE Utilities.
• Previous Source
A ‘Previous Source’ button is like an “undo” button: when you press it, the connection to the
source previously routed to a destination is restored.
• Undefined.
Some remote panel buttons can be left undefined. These buttons do nothing.
A remote panel under NV9000 is not quite the same as under CRSC. The panel has no lock buttons
of any kind. The panel does not have level selection modes. There are two further considerations:
• Default destination.
The default destination is a destination selected for the panel at power-up. That destination
remains selected until an operator selects another destination at the panel.
• Status monitor.
The status monitor is a destination device (such as a video monitor) on which the output(s) of
the currently selected destination are replicated. When you select a different destination, the sta-
tus monitor output reflects that change. When you select a different source for a destination, the
status monitor output reflects that change also.

Modes
Because of the possibility of a default destination, a remote panel can function in two ways: as a
m×1 panel or as m×n panel.
• Takes under an m×1 setup require an operator to press only a source button.
• Takes under an m×n setup require an operator first to press a destination button, then a source
button.
In either case, the operator may press ‘Previous Source’ following a take to revert to the source
used before the take.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 79

5. Operation
CQX Router

References
Refer to NV9000 Router Control Systems on page 142 for information about using an NV9000
router control system.
Refer to whatever NV9000 documentation you can obtain for information about operating an
NV9000 router system. The NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide provides some background infor-
mation about NV900 router control system concepts, and has functional descriptions of most
Miranda NV96xx control panels.

CQX Router

Background
A “clean and quiet” (CQX) router is one that performs smooth transitions in both video and audio.
There are 3 models supporting 3 video formats: 3Gig, HD, and SD.
The “clean and quiet” (CQX) control panel is used with the CQX router. It has 4 dedicated transi-
tion type buttons (cut, v-fade, cut-fade, and fade-cut) and 3 dedicated transition rate buttons (slow,
medium, and fast).
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons
Dest. Lock

2 CQX 6 Aux 4 Transition Type Buttons 3 Transition Rate Buttons Unused Buttons (for future enhancements)
Destinations Destinations . . .

The transition buttons appear in this ordering:

SLO MED FST

Cut V-Fade Cut-Fade Fade-Cut Slow Med Fast

The panel is not configurable at present. (A slow transition is fixed at 3 seconds; medium, at 2 sec-
onds; and fast, at 1 second. See CQX Transition Rates on page 131 for more information.) At
present, the concept of levels does not apply to the CQX router.
The router can be used with a captive panel (mounted on the router) or a remote panel (mounted on
a remote panel module and connected to the router through an Ethernet switch).
S At present, a remote CQX panel’s transition rate and transition type buttons have no effect on
the CQX router’s transitions. The transition rate and type buttons of a captive panel do affect
transitions.
(It is possible to control the router using an third-party automation system but this document does
not address automation.)

80 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 5. Operation
CQX Router

The CQX router models each have 2 CQX outputs and 6 auxiliary outputs. The CQX outputs
exhibit smooth transitions. The auxiliary outputs are “normal” outputs.
Bypass 1, 2
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W (BNC, 75W) Inputs 9–16, BNC, 75W

VIDEO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
REF
IN
LOOP BYP 1 BYP 2
THRU
GPI/O CQX AUX
E146905
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Video Reference GPIO Interface CQX Outputs Aux Outputs, BNC, 75W
(BNC, 75W)

The CQX router models also have 2 bypass video inputs in addition to the 16 video inputs. The
bypass inputs become active if the router loses power. The bypass relay switches when it loses
power, causing the bypass video sources to be routed to the CQX outputs.
The CQX router models each have a GPIO connector (DB25) that supports 16 TTL-level inputs
and 4 high-power outputs, all optically isolated. Each of the 16 GP inputs switches a corresponding
video input to CQ output 1. The GP outputs represent status and alarms.

Startup
To power up a router, connect the 4-pin connector of the power supply to PS1 or PS2. Then plug the
power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two power supplies for redundancy,
connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, the router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its previous
operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and outputs and which of
the outputs are locked.)
S If a router’s rotary switch is set to the 0 position, the router reverts to the factory-default state,
not its previous state.
At power-up, the router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal. It takes about
10 seconds to lock to the reference rate.
At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn panel lock off before
you can use the panel.
Level selection is disabled because the concept of levels does not apply to CQX routers.

Takes
Takes on a CQX panel involve transition type and rate when the destination selected is one of the 2
CQX destinations. Takes do not involve transition type and rate when the destination is one of the 6
auxiliary outputs.
To perform a CQX take, first press a CQX destination button. Then, optionally, choose a transition
type and rate. Then, press a source button. The take occurs nearly immediately (about 5 frame peri-
ods later so that the video processor has time to lock to the new video source).
To perform an auxiliary take, simply press an aux destination button and then a source button. The
take occurs immediately (without a transition effect).
When you press a destination button, it tallies high (amber). The button for the source that corre-
sponds to the selected destination also tallies high (green). When you press another source button,

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 81

5. Operation
CQX Router

the old connection is lost (after the transition), the old source button goes low tally, and the new
source button goes high tally.
Pressing another destination button starts a new route.
S If a destination is locked, it will be low-tally red. If you press its button, it will go high-tally red.
You cannot perform a take for a destination that is locked. See Locks.

Locks
The CQX panel has 7 function buttons. Only panel lock and destination lock are active. The other 5
buttons are disabled:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

16

disabled (5)

Panel Lock
Pressing ‘Panel Lock’ disables the control panel. Only the panel lock button remains enabled.
Pressing it again reenables the control panel.
Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

16

When the control panel is locked, the lock button is bright red and the state of the entire control
panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The panel lock button is low tally
green when the control panel is not locked.
The ‘Panel Lock’ button also prevents takes controlled by the GP inputs. If this panel is a captive
panel, the lock will also prevent takes from a remote panel.

Destination Lock
Destination lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. To lock a
destination, press the destination button, then press Destination Lock. This sample shows DST 5
locked to SRC 3:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Locked Destination

The destination lock button immediately goes high tally red and the current source and destination
are high tally, with the destination button red. Changes to that destination are disabled. If you sub-
sequently press a destination button that is locked, the button goes high tally (red), its source goes
high tally (green) and the destination lock button goes high tally, as this sample shows.
Changes to other destinations are, however, enabled, and specifically, you can route the source that
feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.

82 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 5. Operation
CQX Router

After you select another (unlocked) destination, the locked destination goes low tally red. This
illustration shows DST 1 selected and DST 5 locked. Because DST 1 is not locked, the Destination
Lock button is low tally amber.
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Selected Destination Locked Destination

To unlock a destination, press the destination button and then press Destination Lock (again). The
destination button reverts to amber and the Destination Lock button goes low tally. This illustration
shows DST 5 selected and no longer locked:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 83

5. Operation
CQX Router

84 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

6. Maintenance

Chapter 6 provides instructions regarding maintenance. It discusses the following topics:

• Prevention
• Trouble-Shooting
This document does not address maintenance of NV9000 equipment.

Prevention
There are no user-serviceable parts in the compact routers, control panels, or remote panel modules.
No CR Series product requires any physical maintenance. However, we recommend that you keep
your devices free of dust, water, and contaminants, and ensure that cables are organized so that they
do not short, kink, or break.
Check periodically that your power supplies are working, especially if you are using the second
power connections for redundancy.
Occasionally, Miranda releases new versions of Compact Router software and firmware. If you
order a new router and your existing routers have older software and firmware, the new and the old
products might be incompatible. If you experience difficulties with new routers, contact Miranda to
request software and firmware upgrades.
Update all your network devices to the same firmware revision.
If a router fails, you can perform certain simple diagnostics. Call Miranda if the problem cannot be
solved easily.

Trouble-Shooting
If a CR Series device (router, control panel, or remote panel module) malfunctions, first examine
all input and output connections, all network connections, and all power connections. Verify that
cables are secure at both ends and that they are not broken. Determine that video sources and desti-
nations are on and functioning properly. Verify that the video reference is functioning.
If everything else in your system is functioning properly, the problem is at the device. Here are
some problems that can occur:
• The LED corresponding to your power supply connection does not illuminate.
• Noisy transitions.
• The router gets power, but does not work properly or fails to “remember” its settings.

Power Supply LED Does Not Illuminate

If the device is otherwise functioning properly, the problem is a faulty LED. (Call Miranda for ser-
vice.) If the router is not functioning at all, take the following steps.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 85

6. Maintenance
Trouble-Shooting

Determine whether the external power supply delivers power. (If you cannot do this, call Miranda.)
If it does deliver power, try using the other PS connector. If neither connector works, the router is
“dead.” If one PS connector works and the other doesn’t, the router is defective.
The CRPS1 power supplies from Miranda have an indicator lamp. If the indicator lamp is off,
either the power supply is dead or the AC socket is defective or not connected. Try plugging the
power supply into another socket that you know is working. If the power supply’s indicator light
remains off, the power supply is dead. Otherwise, the AC socket was the problem.

Noisy Transitions
Try using a video reference to align video (and audio) transitions with the sync in the video refer-
ence.
Verify that the video reference signal is appropriate for the router, well-formed, and terminated.
S If you use one of the composite analog signals (525 or 625) as a reference for an HD router, you
will probably introduce switching transients. Because SMPTE specifies the switch point for HD
as NTSC line 4, using an SD reference might cause the switch point to occur at the wrong place
in the HD stream. You might see switching transients. (The SD switch point is specified as
NTSC line 10.) Embedded audio will have a noticeable discontinuity.

CQX Routers
The router will switch at the correct point for HD if its ‘Mode’ switch setting is an HD standard.
See Mode Rotary Switch on page 68 for switch setting details.
For the auxiliary outputs, the video must be aligned to the reference to avoid noisy switches. For
the CQ outputs, the video has only to be within ± 3 lines of the video reference.
S Because of processing delays, a video signal might not line up perfectly with a plant’s timing,
i.e, its reference signal. Aux outputs ignore timing and switches according to the reference. The
2 CQ outputs, on the other hand, allows a certain amount of delay by accepting the video within
± 3 lines of the plant reference. The CQX determines how early or late the video stream is with
respect to the video reference, then delays it so that the output video occurs 3 lines after the ref-
erence. Doing this allows it to process the video and to perform a clean switch.
If the video is outside the ± 3-line window, the CQX does not process the video. Instead, it uses
the non-sync bypass (not emergency bypass) to route the video, so that the switch behaves like
an auxiliary output. As with auxiliary outputs, the bypass can result in glitches in the video and
audio, because no processing is being done.

Router Functioning Improperly

If the router gets power, but the router does not transmit signals properly or does not switch prop-
erly, the router has an indeterminate problem. Call Miranda.
S Level selection can be confusing: when all levels are selected, level buttons are not toggles.
Pressing a level button in this situation turns off all other levels and leaves the one you selected
on. This is by design. Do not think this is a malfunction.
S Occasionally, a button press will fail to make contact. Press the button firmly and straight in. If
a button continues to fail, the control panel, router, or remote panel module might be broken or
you might misunderstand something about the way the routers work.
If a router malfunctions, try resetting the router. Either set its rotary switch to 0 and cycle power or
select the router in CRConfig and click ‘Reset Router’.

86 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 6. Maintenance
Trouble-Shooting

A control panel powers up in ‘Panel Lock’ state. The ‘Panel Lock’ button at the top right is bright
red. Be sure to press ‘Panel Lock’ once (it turns low-tally green) so that the panel can operate.

Network Failure
Determine whether the Ethernet switch has power. If it has power, check whether the switch is bro-
ken. A quick check is to see whether the switch’s activity lights are on or active.
Check the amber and green lights on the Ethernet port on your router or remote panel module.
These should be on and steady (not blinking).
Check your cables. They might be defective or of the wrong type. If your devices are very far apart,
the cable might be too long.
Again, check power.

CRSC Failures
CRSC failures are not likely. But in rare instances, you may experience difficulties:
1 CRSC doesn’t launch or misbehaves.
If your system crashed at any time, CRSC might have been damaged. Try reinstalling CRCon-
fig. The installation might be defective if CRSC fails immediately after installation.
2 CRSC does not detect some or all of the devices in your network.
It is possible that you configured the IP address of your PC incorrectly. Note that the PC must
not use DNS or DHCP on the compact router network. Refer to Levels and IP Addresses in
CRSC Networks, on page 45, for more information.
Router or remote panel module software or firmware is out of date. Get updates from Miranda.
Remove suspect devices one-by-one to see whether the network stabilizes. Rescan the network
in CRSC each time you do so.
You have duplicated levels or IP addresses. Router behavior in this case is unpredictable.
Unless you have assigned IP addresses to your routers and remote panel modules, remote panel
modules must have distinct rotary switch settings (1–F) and routers must have distinct rotary
switch settings.
It is possible that you have more than 8 routers or more than 16 remote panel modules. Results
are not predictable if you do.
Please report all CRSC failures to Miranda.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 87

6. Maintenance
Trouble-Shooting

88 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

7. Technical Details

Chapter 7 provides electrical, video, audio, and mechanical specifications for the CR Series. It dis-
cusses these topics:
• Power Specifications • Video Specifications
• Reference Specifications • Audio Specifications
• Physical Specifications • Drawings
• Environmental Specifications • Defaults
• Connectors

Power Specifications
Table 7-1. CR Series Router and Remote Panel Module Power Specifications.

Specification Detail
DC power External power supply: 12VDC ± 10%, 5A.
Power consumption 15 W nominal (8×8 3Gig, SWB, SD)
10 W nominal (8×8 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
15 W nominal (16×4 3Gig, SWB, SD)
10 W nominal (16×4 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
20 W nominal (16×16 3Gig, SWB, SD)
15 W nominal (16×16 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
25 W nominal (32×4 3Gig, SWB, SD)
20 W nominal (32×4 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
35 W nominal (32×32 3Gig, SWB, SD)
25 W nominal (32×32 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
5 W nominal (8×8AES)
5 W nominal (16×4 AES)
6 W nominal (16×16 AES)
10 W nominal (32×32 AES)
7 W nominal (8×8 analog video)
7 W nominal (16×4 analog video)
9 W nominal (16×16 analog video)
16 W nominal (32×32 analog video)
15 W nominal (8×8 analog audio)
15 W nominal (16×4 analog audio)
18 W nominal (16×16 analog audio)
40 W nominal (32×32 analog audio)
12 W nominal (16-port machine control)
22 W nominal (32-port machine control)
33 W nominal (16×2 CQX router)
Regulatory UL listed and CE compliant.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 89

7. Technical Details
Reference Specifications

Table 7-2. Power Supply Specifications.

Specification Detail
AC power 90–264 VAC (127–300VDC), 47–447Hz.
Inrush current < 50A at 230VAC, cold start, at 25°C,
Input current < 2.0A rms at 115VAC; < 1.0A at 230VAC.
DC power ≤ 60W, 12VDC, 5A (5.4A peak), Regulation ± 2%. Ripple ≤ 120mV.
Efficiency Efficiency > 80% at full load typical, 115VAC.
Weight 1.06 lb (0.48 kg).
Regulatory UL listed and CE compliant.

The power supply is an Miranda PS0001-00:

2.39
[60.7]

5.24
[133.0]
Indicator LED

1.62
[41.0]

AC Input DC Output

Figure 7-1. The power output has Molex 4-pin plug. See Power Cord Retention on page 149.

Reference Specifications
Table 7-3. CR Series Video Reference Specifications.

Detail
Connectors: 2 BNC (1 pair, loop-through), non-terminating, 75Ω characteristic impedance.
All digital routers (HD, SD, AES) accept these video reference rates:
NTSC (30/1.001) Hz frame rate 525 lines/frame
PAL 25 Hz frame rate 625 lines/frame
HD Trilevel (24/1.001) Hz frame rate 1080p
24 Hz frame rate 1080p
25 Hz frame rate 1080i
(30/1.001) Hz frame rate 1080i
30 Hz frame rate 1080i
50 Hz frame rate 1080p, 720p
(60/1.001) Hz frame rate 1080p, 720p
60 Hz frame rate 1080p, 720p
Input level range: 500 mV p-p to 2 V p-p
Input return loss: > 40 dB, to 6 MHz

Machine control routers do not have video reference connectors.

90 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Physical Specifications

Physical Specifications
Table 7-4. CR Series Router Specifications for all CQX Compact Routers (3Gig, HD, and SD).

Specification Detail
Dimensions Height: 1.72″ (43.7 mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75″ or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6 mm).
Depth 9.50 ± 0.01″ (241.3 mm), enclosure.
10.15″ (257.8 mm) overall, including connectors,
10.97″ (278.6 mm) overall, with control panel, including connectors.
Weight 1.7 lb (0.77 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75Ω.
I/O: BNC, 75Ω. 26 connectors.
GPIO: DB25 (16 inputs, 4 outputs)
40-pin, for optional control panel
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

Table 7-5. CR Series Router Specifications for all 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and Analog Video Compact Routers.

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72″ (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75″ or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47″ (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50″ or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
Depth 0.693± 0.01″ (17.6 mm), enclosure.
≤ 1.29″ (31.8 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
≤ 1.41″ (35.8mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
≤ 2.23″ (56.6mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 16×16: 1.7 lb (0.77 kg) without control panel.
16×4: 1.47 lb (0.67 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 32×32: 3.23 lb (1.47 kg) without control panel.
32×4: 2.69 lb (1.22 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75Ω.
I/O: BNC, 75Ω. 16×16 routers: 32 connectors, 32×32 routers: 64
connectors, 16×4 routers: 20 connectors, 32×4 routers: 36 connectors.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 91

7. Technical Details
Physical Specifications

Table 7-6. CR Series Analog Audio Router Specifications.

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72″ (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75″ or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47″ (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50″ or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
Depth 1.55± 0.01″ (39.4 mm), enclosure.
≤ 2.16″ (54.9 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
≤ 2.28″ (57.9 mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
≤ 3.10″ (78.7 mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 16×16: 1.83 lb (0.830 kg) without control panel.
16×4:1.71 lb (0.774 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 32×32: 3.09 lb (1.402 kg) without control panel.
32×4: 3.00 lb (1.362 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-485: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75Ω.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
I/O Connectors CR1616-AA: 8 DB25s, each having 8 STPs (64 connections).
CR3204-AA: 9 DB25s, each having 8 STPs (72 connections).
CR3232-AA: 16 DB25s, each having 8 STPs (128 connections).
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

Table 7-7. CR Series Machine Control Router Physical Specifications.

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72″ (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75″ or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47″ (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50″ or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
Depth 0.693± 0.01″ (17.6 mm), enclosure.
≤ 1.29″ (31.8 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
≤ 1.41″ (35.8mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
≤ 2.23″ (56.6mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 1.31 lb (0.596 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 2.21 lb (1.004 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
Automation: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, RS-485/422, usage determined by
software, SMPTE 207M.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
I/O Connectors CR16-PR: 16 RJ-45, 1 Mb/s.
CR32-PR: 32 RJ-45, 1 Mb/s.
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

92 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Environmental Specifications

Table 7-8. CR Series Control Panel Physical Specifications.

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.66″ (42.2mm),
Width: 17.62″ (447.5mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.41″ (86.6mm),
Width: 17.62″ (447.5mm).
Depth 0.50″ (12.7mm) enclosure,
0.82″ (20.8mm) overall.
1RU weight 16×16: 0.75 lb (0.34 kg),
16×4: 0.70 lb (0.32 kg),
16×2: 0.69 lb (0.31 kg).
2RU weight 32×32: 1.43 b (0.65 kg).
32×4: 1.31 lb (0.59 kg).
Connectors 1RU: 40-pin, to the Compact Router,
2RU: 60-pin, to the Compact Router.

Table 7-9. CR Series Remote Panel Module Physical Specifications.

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72″ (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75″ or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47″ (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50″ or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0″ (482.6mm).
Depth 0.693± 0.01″ (17.6 mm), enclosure.
≤ 1.29″ (31.8 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
≤ 1.41″ (35.8mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
≤ 2.23″ (56.6mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 1.06 lb (0.48 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 1.83 lb (0.83 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

Environmental Specifications
Table 7-10. CR Series Environmental Specifications.

Specification Detail
Operating temperature 0–40°C, ambient.
Relative humidity 0 to 90%, non-condensing.
Cooling No fan required, except for the analog audio routers.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 93

7. Technical Details
Connectors

Connectors

Serial Connector
The automation connector for all CR Series Compact Routers has this pinout:
Gnd
TX– 1 Gnd
6
RX+ TX+

Gnd RX–
9
5 Gnd
n.c.

The connector is RS-485, but can be used as RS-422. Most of the compact routers allow RS-485
multi-drop now and eventually all will support it.
Customers who want to operate the router through an automation system may contact Miranda
technical support for information.

DB25 Connectors

Analog Audio Routers

The analog audio routers use DB25 connectors. Each connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs):
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

For 16×16 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and 25–32, respec-
tively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs (and outputs) are treated as 16 ste-
reo pairs.
For 32×32 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–
48, 49–56, and 57–64, respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs (and
outputs) are treated as 32 stereo pairs.
For 32×4 routers, the connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56,
and 57–64, respectively. The inputs and outputs are labelled accordingly. The inputs are treated as
32 stereo pairs. The single output connector provides outputs 1–8 (4 stereo pairs). The inputs and
outputs are labelled accordingly.

94 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Connectors

GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers

The CQX routers use DB25 connectors for GPIO (general-purpose I/O). The connector supports 16
inputs and 4 outputs:
Inputs
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

13 1
–
+
25 14
– + – + – + – +
4 3 2 1
16 15 14
Outputs
Inputs

The 16 inputs are in order on pins 1 through 16. The outputs are paired on pins 17–24. Pin 25 is
ground.

Inputs
Each input circuit has an individual signal connection, but all the inputs share a single ground con-
nection:
+3.3V +3.3V

3.24K 10K

to internal bus
C
Input n
Optical
Isolation
E
Customer’s
Switch (or MOCD223-M
Equivalent
Logic)

The input turns on (a positive-going pulse) when the signal is connected to ground (on the connec-
tor). The positive-going pulse on input N switches video input N to CQ output 1, where 1 ≤ N ≤ 16.
The router firmware debounces the inputs and requires about 100 ms between the positive edges of
pulses.

Outputs
The output circuit requires an external voltage source:
+2.5V

121
Output n

+ V
Optical
Isolation 30V Customer’s Load
from –
internal bus
PS7221A-2A
Optional Grounding

The Schottky diode across the output limits applications to less than 30 VDC.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 95

7. Technical Details
Connectors

The outputs represent alarm states.

• Output 1 (power supply).
If you have connected two power supplies and one malfunctions or is disconnected, output 1
signals an alarm.
• Output 2 (video reference).
If the router has no video reference or the video reference is disconnected, output 2 signals an
alarm.
• Output 3 (fans).
If any of the fans stop turning, output 3 signals an alarm.
• Output 4 (bypass).
If the router has no power at all, output 4 signals an alarm. (This condition can occur if both
power supplies fail or are disconnected or if main power fails.)
A GP output turns off to signal an alarm condition. When the CQX router is running properly,
all 4 GP outputs are on.

96 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Video Specifications

Video Specifications
Table 7-11. CR Series Digital Video Specifications1.

Specification Detail
3Gig Auto re-clocking: 270 Mb/s, and 1.483, 1.485, 2.966, and 2.970 Gb/s, or
auto bypass. Pass-through: 10 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
Input & output impedance: 75Ω.
> 400 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, 270 MB/s.
> 150 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, near 1.5 GB/s.
> 100 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, near 3.0 GB/s.
> 80 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, near 3.0 GB/s for CQX routers.
Input return loss: > 15 dB, 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz.
Output level: 800mV pp ± 10%.
Output offset: 0VDC ± 0.5V.
Output rise/fall time: ≤ 135 ps.
Output overshoot: ≤ 10% of amplitude.
Output timing jitter: ≤ 0.2 UI p-p.
Output alignment jitter: ≤ 0.3 UI at 100 kHz
Output return loss: > 10 dB, 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz.
HD-SDI (SWB) Data rates: up to 1.5 Gbps, reclocking at 143, 177, 270, 360 & 540Mb/s
and 1.483 & 1.485Gb/s rates, automatic bypass for other rates.
Input & output impedance: 75Ω.
Cable equalization: up to 150m Belden 1694A or equivalent cable, at
1.483Gb/s and 1.485Gb/s, and 400m at 143–540Mb/s.
Input return loss: ≥ 15dB, 5MHz to 1.5GHz.
Output level: 800mV pp ± 10%.
Output offset: 0VDC ± 0.5V.
Output rise/fall time: ≤ 270ps (20% to 80%).
Output overshoot: ≤ 10% of amplitude.
Output jitter: ≤ 0.2 UI p-p.
Output return loss: ≥ 15dB, 5MHz to 1.5GHz.
SD-SDI Data rates: auto reclocking at 143, 177, 270, 360 & 540Mb/s and automatic
bypass for other rates.
Input & output impedance: 75Ω.
Cable equalization: up to 300m Belden 1694A or equivalent cable.
Input return loss: ≥ 15dB, 5 to 540MHz.
Output level: 800mV pp ± 10%.
Output offset: 0VDC ± 0.5V.
Output rise/fall time: 0.4 to 1.5 ns.
Output overshoot: ≤ 10% of amplitude.
Output jitter: ≤ 0.2 UI p-p.
Output return loss: ≥ 15dB, 5MHz to 540MHz.

1. All compact SD, HD, and 3Gig video routers support DVB-ASI.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 97

7. Technical Details
Video Specifications

Table 7-12. CR Series Analog Video Specifications.

Specification Detail
Signal inputs (NTSC, PAL) Input level: 1Vp-p nominal.
Input range: ±2V.
Input return loss: < –45dB, DC to 6MHz.
Input CMRR: > 60dB at 120Hz.
Signal outputs (NTSC, PAL) Output level: 1Vp-p nominal.
Output offset: DC offset 0V ± 30 mV, relative to back porch.
Output return loss: < –45dB, DC to 6MHz.
Output-to-output isolation: > 90dB at subcarrier frequency.
Signal specifications Insertion loss: 0dB ± 0.1dB.
Frequency response: 0dBr ± 0.05dBr, DC to 6MHz.
Crosstalk: < –65dB, at subcarrier frequency.
Noise spectrum: < –60dB (test signal: luminance ramp.
Differential gain: < 0.1% at subcarrier frequency.
Differential phase: < 0.1° at subcarrier frequency.
Delay scatter: < ±0.65° at subcarrier, any input to any output.
Tilt: < 0.1%.
DC coupled system.
Video reference Input level range: 500 mVp-p to 2Vp-p.
Input return loss: > –40dB, DC to 6MHz.

98 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Audio Specifications

Audio Specifications
Table 7-13. CR Series Digital Audio (AES) Specifications.

Specification Detail
Signal inputs Signal type: AES3id (2 “mono” channels per input).
Sample rate: 32kHz – 192kHz.
Input level: 1V p-p nominal into 75Ω.
Input range: 200mV p-p to 3V p-p into 75Ω.
Input return loss: < –25dB, from 100kHz to 6MHz.
Input connectors: BNC, 75Ω.
Signal outputs Signal type: AES3id (2 “mono” channels per input).
Sample rate: async, 32kHz – 192kHz; sync, 48kHz.
Output level: 1V p-p ± 10% into 75Ω.
Output offset: 0.0VDC ± 50mVDC, AC coupled.
Output rise/fall time: 4ns – 8ns.
Output jitter: < 1ns, in synchronous mode.
Output return loss: < –25dB, from 100kHz to 6MHz.
Output-to-output isolation: > 40dB, from 100kHz to 6MHz.
Output connectors: BNC, 75Ω.

Table 7-14. Compact Router Analog Audio Specifications.

Specification Detail
Signal inputs Input level: Up to 24dBu.
Input impedance: > 20kΩ.
Input CMRR: > 75dBu.
Input connectors: DB25.
Signal outputs Output level: Up to 24dBu (unity gain).
Input to output level variations: ± 1dB, nominal.
Frequency response: < ± 0.05dB from 20Hz to 100kHz.
Output impedance: 50Ω, nominal.
THD and noise: < 0.002%.
Crosstalk: > 85dB, worst case.
SNR: > 100dB, relative to +24dBu (20Hz to 20kHz).
Output connectors: DB25.

Drawings
The following drawings identify features and provide overall and critical dimensions. The drawings
are grouped as follows:
• 1RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules
• CQX Routers and Control Panel
• 2RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 99

7. Technical Details
Drawings

1RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules

PS1

PS2

FRAME ID
Power LEDs

16-Pos. Rotary Switch

All the 1RU compact routers have the same features and
dimensions at the front, except for the legends:
Cover Plate over Control

Legend Product Category

16.74 [425.2]

CR1616-3Gig Digital Video Router

19.0 [482.6]

Panel Connector

CR1616-HD Digital Video Router

CR1616-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR1616-SD Digital Video Router
CR1616-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR1616-AES Digital Audio Router
CR1616-AV Analog Video Router
CR1616-AA Analog Audio Router
CR1604-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR1604-HD Digital Video Router
CR1604-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR1604-SD Digital Video Router
0.375 x 0.25 [9.5 x 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x

CR1604-SD-NR Digital Video Router

CR1604-AES Digital Audio Router
CR1604-AV Analog Video Router
CR1604-AA Analog Audio Router
CR0808-3Gig Digital Video Router
‹Product Category›
‹LEGEND›

CR0808-HD Digital Video Router

CR0808-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR0808-SD Digital Video Router
CR0808-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR0808-AES Digital Audio Router
CR0808-AV Analog Video Router
CR0808-AA Analog Audio Router
CR16-PR Machine Control Router
[31.75]
1.25
[43.7]
1.72

Figure 7-2. Front View of the 1RU Routers

100 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

16 Inputs, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET IN
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOOP
IN THRU
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E146905
OUT
PS2

PS1, 16 Outputs, BNC 75W

Power conn.
Video Reference, BNC 75W
PS2,
GND Lug 0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Power conn.
Ethernet
RS-422

Figure 7-3. Rear and Top Views of the 16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers
7. Technical Details

101
Drawings
102
Drawings

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

16 Video Inputs, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET IN
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOOP
IN THRU
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 1 2 3 4
E146905
OUT
PS2

PS1,
Power conn.
4 Video Outputs, BNC 75W
PS2,
Power conn. Video Reference, BNC 75W
0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
GND Lug
RS-422
Ethernet

Figure 7-4. Rear and Top Views of the 16×4 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and AV Routers

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

8 Inputs, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET IN
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOOP
IN THRU
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E146905
OUT
PS2

PS1, 8 Outputs, BNC 75W

Power conn. 0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Video Reference, BNC 75W
PS2,
GND Lug
Power conn.
Ethernet
RS-422

Figure 7-5. Rear and Top Views of the 8×8 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and AV Routers
7. Technical Details

103
Drawings
104
Drawings

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

Inputs 1–8, BNC 75W Inputs 9–16, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
LOOP
IN THRU OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
E146905

PS2

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16

Figure 7-6. Rear and Top Views of the CR1616-AV

PS1,
Power conn. BNC 75W BNC 75W

PS2, Video Reference, BNC 75W

Power conn. 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
GND Lug
RS-422 Ethernet

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

0.892 [22.7] 17.216 [437.3]

PS1, Ethernet
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32
(power)

PS1 CTRL ETHERNET E146905

1.72 1.25 DC VIDEO INPUTS 1 2 4 INPUTS

IN REF 3 1-8OUTPUTS 9-16 17-24 25-32
[43.7] [31.75] +12V LOOP 5 6 8
9K50 THRU
7

Figure 7-7. Rear and Top Views of the CR1616-AA

PS2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16 Outputs 17–24 Outputs 25–32

PS2,
(power) GND Lug Fan
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
RS-485 Video Reference, BNC 75W
7. Technical Details

105
Drawings
106
Drawings

2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.7] 17.216 [437.3]

PS1, Ethernet Lexan Cover Plate

Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16
(power)

PS1 CTRL ETHERNET E146905

1.72 1.25 DC VIDEO INPUTS 1 2 4 INPUTS

IN REF 3 1-8OUTPUTS 9-16 17-24 25-32
[43.7] [31.75] +12V LOOP 5 6 8
9K50 THRU
7

Figure 7-8. Rear and Top Views of the CR0808-AA

PS2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16

PS2,
(power) GND Lug Fan
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
RS-485 Video Reference, BNC 75W

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

0.892 [22.7] 17.216 [437.3]

PS1, Ethernet
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32
(power)

PS1 CTRL ETHERNET E146905

1.72 1.25 DC VIDEO INPUTS 1 2 4 INPUTS

IN REF 3 1-8OUTPUTS 9-16 17-24 25-32
[43.7] [31.75] +12V LOOP 5 6 8
9K50 THRU
7

Figure 7-9. Rear and Top Views of the CR1604-AA

PS2 OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8
PS2,
(power) GND Lug Fan
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
RS-485 Video Reference, BNC 75W
7. Technical Details

107
Drawings
108
Drawings

1.41max 1.29 max

[35.81] [32.77]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

PS1 CTRL
9K50
ETHERNET
1.72 1.25 DC
IN
[43.7] [31.75] +12V
E146905 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PORTS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PS2

Figure 7-10. Rear and Top Views of the CR16-PR

PS1, 16 Bidirectional Ports, RJ-45
Power conn. GND Lug
PS2, Ethernet
RS-422 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Power conn.

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[42.2]
1.66
[12.7]

[21.1]
0.50

0.86
Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock Button

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Destination Lock Button
Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]

Destination Buttons (1–16)

Source Buttons (1–16)
Knurled Screws (2x)

Figure 7-11. Front and Top Views of the CP1616 Control Panel

Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a CRSC
system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 109

7. Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[42.2]
1.66
[12.7]

[21.1]
0.50

0.86
Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock Button

CP0808

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Destination Lock Button
Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]

Destination Buttons (1–16)

Source Buttons (1–16)
Knurled Screws (2x)

Figure 7-12. Front and Top Views of the CP0808 Control Panel

Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a CRSC
system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

110 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[42.2]
1.66
[12.7]

[21.1]
0.50

0.86

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock Button

CP1604

CP1602
Destination Lock Button
Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]
Source Buttons (1–16)

Destination Buttons (1–4)

Destination Buttons (1, 2)

Knurled Screws (2x)

Figure 7-13. Front and Top Views of the CP1604 and CP1602 Control Panels

Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a CRSC
system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 111

112
Drawings

Ground Lug Ethernet

RS-422
PS1, PS2

1.41max 1.29max
7. Technical Details

[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

16.74 [425.2]

Power LEDs

1.72 1.25
[43.7] [31.75]

Cover Plate over Control

Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x 16-Pos. Rotary Switch
Panel Connector
0.375 x 0.25 [9.5 x 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x

Figure 7-14. Front and Top Views of the RP16 Remote Panel Module

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.41 max 1.29max
[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

(pin 1)

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

PS1 CTRL 9K50
CONFIG
ON DIP
ETHERNET
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.72 1.25 DC
[43.7] [31.75] IN
+12V E146905

PS2

(unused)
PS1,
Power conn. GND Lug
Ethernet
0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
PS2,
Power conn. RS-422

Figure 7-15. Rear and Top Views of the RP16 Remote Panel Module
7. Technical Details

113
Drawings
114
Drawings

Remote Panel Module

1.29 max 1.41 max

7. Technical Details

[32.77] [35.81]
2.23 max
[56.6]
0.50 [12.7]

Control Panel

19.0 [482.6]
17.62 [447.5]
16.74 [425.2]

Figure 7-16. Front and Top Views of an RP16 and Control Panel Assembly

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Drawings

CQX Routers and Control Panel

16

8
15

7
AUX
14

6
13

5
12

4
11

3
CQX
10

2
9

1
OUT
BYP 2
BYP 1
GPI/O
8

16.74 [425.2]
17.60 [447.0]

19.0 [482.6]
19.0 [482.6]

7
6
5

E146905
4
3
2
1

IN

All CQX compact routers (1RU) have the same

VIDEO

THRU
LOOP
REF

features and dimensions, except for the

legends:
Legend: Product Category
CR1602-3Gig-CQX Clean and Quiet Router
ETHERNET

CR1602-HD-CQX Clean and Quiet Router

CR1602-SD-CQX Clean and Quiet Router
CTRL
PS1

PS2
+12V
DC
IN
[31.75]

[31.75]
1.25

1.25
[43.7]

[43.7]
1.72

1.72

Figure 7-17. Front and Rear Views of the CQX Routers

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 115

7. Technical Details
Drawings

17.60 [447.0]

19.0 [482.6]
[241.3]
9.5

[257.8]
10.15

Figure 7-18. Top View of the CQX Routers

116 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Drawings

0.485 [12.319]
[25.8]
1.017

[42.2]
1.66

[]21.1
0.83

17.62 [447.5]
16.74 [355.6]

Figure 7-19. Top View of the CQX Panel

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 117

7. Technical Details
Drawings

2RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules

BCD
A

E 2
7 89

F0 1
Power LEDs 3 456

16-Pos. Rotary Switch

Cover Plate over Control
Panel Connector
16.74 [425.2]
19.0 [482.6]

All the 2RU compact routers have the same features and
dimensions at the front, except for the legends:
Legend: Product Category
CR3204-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR3232-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR3204-HD Digital Video Router
CR3204-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR3232-HD Digital Video Router
CR3232-HD-NR Digital Video Router
0.375 x 0.25 [9.5 x 6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x

CR3204-SD Digital Video Router

CR3204-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR3232-SD Digital Video Router
CR3232-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR3204-AES Digital Audio Router
CR3232-AES Digital Audio Router
‹Product Category›
‹LEGEND›

CR3204-AV Analog Video Router

CR3232-AV Analog Video Router
CR3204-AA Analog Audio Router
CR3232-AA Analog Audio Router
CR32-PR Machine Control Routing Switcher
[44.5]

[31.8]
1.75

1.25
[88.1]
3.47

Figure 7-20. Front View of the 2RU Routers

118 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

32 Inputs, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 LOOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[44.5] DC THRU IN
IN
+12V
PS2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.47 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

[88.1] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1.25 9K50
E146905
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OUT 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet 32 Outputs, BNC 75W
GND Lug RS-422
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x

Figure 7-21. Rear and Top Views of the 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers
7. Technical Details

119
Drawings
120
Drawings

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
32 Inputs, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 LOOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[44.5] DC THRU IN
IN
+12V
PS2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.47 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

[88.1] 1 2 3 4

1.25 9K50
E146905
OUT
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet 4 Outputs,
BNC 75W 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
GND Lug RS-422

Figure 7-22. Rear and Top Views of the 32×4 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

Inputs 1–16, BNC 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20
LOOP
[44.5] DC THRU 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
IN 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
+12V
PS2
3.47 OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS
[88.1]

9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28

Figure 7-23. Rear and Top Views of the CR3232-AV

1.25 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28
9K50
E146905 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet Outputs 1–16 Outputs 17–32
GND Lug BNC 75W BNC 75W
RS-422
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
7. Technical Details

121
Drawings
122
Drawings

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
Outputs 1–4, BNC 75W Inputs 1–16, BNC 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20
LOOP
[44.5] DC THRU OUTPUTS 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
IN 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
+12V
PS2
3.47 INPUTS OUTPUTS
[88.1]

25 26 27 28

Figure 7-24. Rear and Top Views of the CR3204-AV

1.25 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28
9K50
E14690 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32
[31.8] 5

PS2
Ethernet
GND Lug RS-422 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

0.892 [22.6] 17.216 [437.3]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
I/O 1–8 I/O 9–16 I/O 33–40 I/O 41–48

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1
1.75 VIDEO OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
REF 1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48
DC LOOP

Figure 7-25. Rear and Top Views of the CR3232-AA

[44.5] IN THRU
+12V
INPUTS INPUTS
PS2
3.47
[88.1]
INPUTS INPUTS

1.25 9K50 17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

E146905 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet I/O 17–24 I/O 25–32 I/O 49–56 I/O 57–64

GND Lug RS-485

Fan 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
7. Technical Details

123
Drawings
124
Drawings

2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]
7. Technical Details

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.6] 17.216 [437.3]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
I/O 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 33–40 Inputs 41–48

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1
1.75 VIDEO OUTPUTS
REF 1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48
DC LOOP

Figure 7-26. Rear and Top Views of the CR3204-AA

[44.5] IN THRU
+12V
INPUTS INPUTS
PS2
3.47
[88.1]
INPUTS INPUTS

1.25 9K50 17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

E146905
[31.8]

PS2 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32 Inputs 49–56 Inputs 57–64

Ethernet

GND Lug RS-485

Fan 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.41 max 1.29 max
[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

PS1

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

Bidirectional Ports 1–16

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1
1.75
[44.5] DC
IN
+12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PS2
3.47 PORTS
[88.1]

Figure 7-27. Rear and Top Views of the CR32-PR

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1.25 9K50
E146905
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet Bidirectional Ports 17–32
GND Lug RS-422
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
7. Technical Details

125
Drawings
7. Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[86.6]
3.41

1.705
[12.7]

[43.3]
0.50

Power Supply LEDs

Panel Lock Button
Destination Lock Button

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]

Destination Buttons (1–32)

Source Buttons (1–32)
Knurled Screws (2x)

Figure 7-28. Front and Top Views of the CP3232 Control Panel

Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a CRSC
system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

126 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[86.6]
3.41

1.705
[12.7]

[43.3]
0.50

Power Supply LEDs

Panel Lock Button
Destination Lock Button

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]
Source Buttons (1–32)

Destination Buttons (1–4)

Knurled Screws (2x)

Figure 7-29. Front and Top Views of the CP3204 Control Panel

Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a CRSC
system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 127

128
Drawings

RS-422 Ground Lug

Ethernet PS1, PS2
7. Technical Details

1.41 max 1.29 max

[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

16.74 [425.2]

Power LEDs

1.75 7 89
A
3 456
BCD

E 2
[44.5] F0 1

3.47
[88.1]

1.25
[31.8]

Figure 7-30. Front and Top Views of the RP32 Remote Panel Module
Cover Plate over Control 16-Pos. Rotary Switch
Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x
Panel Connector
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x

Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 1.41max 1.29 max
[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

PS1

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide

(unused)

CTRL
CONFIG
ON DIP
ETHERNET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PS1
1.75
[44.5] DC
IN
+12V
PS2
3.47
[88.1]

1.25 9K50
E146905
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
GND Lug RS-422

Figure 7-31. Rear and Top Views of the RP32 Remote Panel Module
7. Technical Details

129
Drawings
7. Technical Details
Drawings

[56.6]
2.23
[35.81]
1.41max

0.50 [12.7]
[32.77]
1.29max

BCD
A

E 2
7 89

F0 1
3 456
Remote Panel Module

17.62 [447.5]
16.74 [425.2]
19.0 [482.6]
Control Panel

Figure 7-32. Front and Top Views of an RP32 and Control Panel Assembly

130 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 7. Technical Details
Defaults

Defaults

Default Router State

The factory-default state is to be in stand-alone mode.
The default routing state of a compact router is for input 1 to connect to output 1, input 2 to connect
to output 2, and so on for all inputs and outputs. This is called a diagonal routing. (After you have
made routing changes, the power-up state of the inputs and outputs is the state you last created.)
S If the router’s rotary switch is at position 0, the router will reset to its factory-default state at
power-up.
For machine control routers, a diagonal route means that the ports are tri-stated (disabled). The ini-
tial (and default) state of machine control ports is “dynamic” and diagonal.

Default Remote Panel Module State

The factory-default state of a remote panel module is to be in stand-alone mode.
S If the remote panel module’s rotary switch is at position 0, it will reset to its factory-default
state at power-up.

Initial Control Panel State

The initial control panel state at power up is “Panel Lock” with all levels selected. Before perform-
ing an operation on any control panel (remote or local) you must turn off its panel lock.
S Remember that a Panel Lock button locks that panel. It does not lock a router, a remote panel
module, other control panels, or the network.

Control Panel Configuration in NV9000-SE Utilities

The initial remote panel configuration (RP16 or RP32) is empty. It has no default destination and
no status monitor output.

CQX Transition Rates

The CQX routers support 3 transition rates: slow, medium, and fast. The actual rate is adjusted in
the router to make the transition times of the different routers uniform:
Transition Period (in Frames)
Video Format Slow Medium Fast
1080i, 59.94, NTSC 90 60 30
1080i, 50, PAL 75 50 25
720p, 50 150 100 50
720p, 60 180 120 60

Thus, slow is nominally 3 seconds, medium is 2 seconds, and fast is 1 second. At 59.94 Hz (or
29.97 Hz), of course, the transition periods are actually 1.001, 2.002, or 3.003 seconds.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 131

7. Technical Details
Defaults

132 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

8. Misc. Topics

Chapter 8 provides the following:

• Glossary
• NV9000 Network Example
• NV9000 Router Control Systems
• Compact Routers in an NV9000 System
• Ordering Information
• Cabling
• Power Cord Retention

Glossary
AES/EBU (Audio Engineering Society/European Broadcasting Union). AES and EBU are standards organiza-
tions.
AES3, AES/EBU formulated this professional serial interface in 1992. The standard typically transmits
AES3id PCM and Dolby Digital 5.1, but is not tied to any particular sampling rate or any particular audio
format.
Miranda’s compact AES routers support AES3id and provide 75Ω BNC connectors. AES3id is
specified for 75Ω coaxial cable up to 1000 meters.
Asynchronous As it applies to the compact AES routers, “asynchronous” means switched without a video refer-
ence signal. In asynchronous mode, the AES router passes the input to the output unmodified.
Breakaway A route where signals are taken from different sources. A breakaway might, for example, take
video from one source and audio from another source.
CQX An abbreviation for “clean and quiet.”
Device A device is a grouping of input and output ports that define a logical entity. (The logical entity does
not have to be a real entity.) For example, a system might have 3 levels: video, AES, and time code.
A hypothetical device in this system is Camera 1, which consists of video on input port 1 of the
video router, AES on input port 5 of the AES router, and time code on input port 8 of the time code
router. (You can use an analog audio router to router time-code signals.)
DVB-ASI (Digital Video Broadcast — Asynchronous Signal Interface) A transmission scheme for MPEG-2 payloads at
up to 270 Mbps. It was developed for transmission over long distances subject to high noise levels.
High-tally Bright, in reference to a lamp or LED.
Hold During a breakaway take, the level selections remain unchanged. (‘No Hold’ means that levels are
selected anew at the next source or next destination.
Input/output Inputs and outputs are the physical connections on the back of the router. The term “input port” is
used interchangeably with “input” and the term “output port” is used interchangeably with “out-
put.”

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 133

8. Misc. Topics
Glossary

IP address A 32-bit number that identifies a device on an Ethernet LAN. The address is commonly expressed
as a series of 4 numbers separated by periods. Each of the 4 numbers represents 8 of the 32 bits.
Level In a compact router system, a (physical) level is the same thing as a router partition. (The partition
can be the entire router.)
Lock A “destination lock” protects a destination from being switched to a different source. A “panel
lock” prevents accidental changes at a panel.
Low-tally Dim, in reference to a lamp or LED.
Operator The term operator refers to control panel users as opposed to system configurers or system admin-
istrators. An operator is responsible for making the routes.
Port In general, a port is a physical connection on a router. For compact machine control routers, a port
is a bidirectional serial connector. A machine control router is also called a port router.
Remote Panel A CR Series product that sends take and lock messages to routers in a CR Series network. The
Module remote panel module receives commands from an attached CR Series control panel. The remote
panel module receives status messages from the routers in the network, and in turn, illuminates its
control panel buttons according to the status messages.
The remote panel module is also a place to mount a control panel.
Primary level A destination’s primary level is the first level in the list of levels assigned to the destination.
Salvo A salvo is a stored group of takes that can be recalled and executed at a control panel.
Source/ The term “source device” is used interchangeably with “source” and the term “destination device”
Destination is used interchangeably with “destination.” A source is a device that is connected to one or more
input ports. A destination is a device that is connected to one or more output ports. An example of
such a device would be a monitor.
A device can be both a source and destination. An example of such a device is a VTR.
Subnet mask A 32-bit number that distinguishes the common part of an IP address from the unique part. For two
IP addresses [Link] and [Link], the common parts are 192.168.2 and the unique parts
are 10 and 30 respectively. The common part has 24 bits. The subnet mask in this example is
[Link].
SWB (Super Wide Band). A term originated by Miranda’s NVISION business group that refers to the
ability of a router to pass a wide range of digital bit rates and formats. Miranda’s SWB supports
data rates from 10 Mbps to about 1.5 Gbps. The HD-SDI routers reclock at 143, 177, 270, 360, and
540MB/s and 1.483 and 1.485Gb/s. The HD routers bypass re-clocking for non-video rates.
Synchronous As it applies to the AES routers, “synchronous” means switched in relation to the sync obtained
from a video reference signal. The AES routers perform certain functions when in “synchronous”
mode, namely (1) outputting an AES stream at 48kHz, and (2) switching mono channels.
Take A take is a route. The panel operator “takes” a source (to a destination).
3Gig The term “3Gig” describes Miranda devices capable of operating at 2.97 Gb/s or 2.966 Gb/s1 and
lower rates. (They reclock at 2.97 Gb/s, 2.966 Gb/s, 270 MB/s, 1.483 Gb/s,1 and 1.485 Gb/s).

1. 2.97 / 1.001; 1.485 / 1.001

134 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

NV9000 Network Example

This is a simple example. It uses a 16×16 SD router, a 32×32 AES router, and a CP1616 (remote
panel) to route 16 sources having 3 levels (SD, AES1/2, and AES3/4) to 16 destination devices
having the same levels. For the sake of simplicity, assume that all the source devices are identical
and all the output devices (the destinations) are identical.
Any take will route all 3 levels from one of 16 sources to one of 16 destinations.

Connectivity
This diagram shows the connections of the routers and the remote panel’s button assignments:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AES
IN
AES12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AES34

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUT 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CP1616
Source 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREV SLVO
SRC 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Dest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SLVO SLVO SLVO SLVO

2 3 4 5

The AES router, with 32 inputs and 32 outputs, allows two levels for 16 sources and two levels for
16 destinations. The SD router, of course, provides one level for 16 sources and 16 destinations.
The panel is straightforward, having 16 source buttons and 16 destination buttons. Takes are sim-
ple: press a destination button then press a source button. The ‘Previous Source’ button allows you
to undo a mistake.
There are 5 salvo buttons. In this example, the actual salvos are left undefined. You will use
NV9000-SE Utilities to define salvos. It is not complex.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 135

8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

Initial Setup
Levels
This figure shows the initial level setup in CRSC:

The levels are number 1, 2, and 3. The AES router defines 2 of the levels. Note how the inputs and
outputs are partititioned at the right. (The 32x32 AES routers have 64 inputs and 64 outputs. The
inputs occur in pairs on the input connectors. The outputs occur in pairs on the output connectors.)
S In NV9000-SE Utilities, you will represent the pairs by their odd-numbered inputs or outputs.

Remote Panel
This figure shows the initial remote panel setup in CRSC:

136 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

Routers
This figure shows the ‘Routers’ page in NV9000-SE Utilities:

Two routers were defined. This configuration page defines the AES Router:

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 137

8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

This configuration page defines the SD Router:

The AES router defines two physical levels. The SD router defines one physical level.

138 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

Levels
The simple example defines one level set “All Levels”:

Note the correspondence between the virtual levels here and the levels defined in CRSC.
Note also the mapping of the virtual levels to the physical levels of the routers.

Devices
It is by creating “devices” that you enumerate the I/O connections of your routers.
Each device you define is assigned to a level set. In this example, there is just one level set.
In NV9000-SE Utilities, you have a choice for entering device data: you can use the ‘Devices’ con-
figuration page, the ‘Add Device’ page (under the ‘Tasks’ pane) or the ‘Add Multiple Devices’
page (also under ‘Tasks’).

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 139

8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

This figure illustrates the I/Os for one device:

The device illustrated is named “input 1.” In this example, the other devices are named “input m” or
“output n.” In your system, of course, you may name the devices as you like.
As a general rule, you assign numbers in the ‘Input’ column to input devices and numbers in the
‘Output’ column to output devices.
The numbers for inputs and outputs are subject to the ranges you listed for the partitions (physical
levels) you defined in the definition of the routers.
In the case of the AES34 level, the range of inputs is 33–64 (in pairs). Thus, the first input is 33.
However, for AES routers, inputs always occur in pairs on the connectors. The first connector for
the AES34 level carries inputs 33 and 34. That pair is represented by its odd input, 33.
Other input pairs follow the same pattern.
S Although analog audio inputs and outputs are paired, you use the pair number in NV9000-SE
Utilities, not the input number. For example, you refer to input pair (17,18) as input 9.

140 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

The following table is the result of device entry for this example:

Note that the input and output pairs are represented by the odd-numbered member of the pair.

Panel
This figure shows the panel configuration for the simple example:

The example has no default destination and no status monitor output. It does have a ‘Previous
Source’ button and 5 salvo buttons. This example leaves the salvos undefined. You cannot actually
assign a salvo to a button until it has been defined.
The names of your inputs and outputs appear as the button legends here in the configuration page.
The names of your salvos appear as the button legends. These names do not appear on the actual
remote panel. (You can create physical button legend inserts using graphics and text.)

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 141

8. Misc. Topics
NV9000 Router Control Systems

NV9000 Router Control Systems

Miranda offers two control systems: the NV9000 and the NV915. The NV9000 and NV915 support
many different types of control panels. The NV915 operates like the NV9000, but is smaller and
has a more limited feature set at less cost.
The NV9000 and NV915 systems offer features and services not available in the CR Series routers
alone.

NV9000
NV9000 systems can be ordered in different configurations, characterized in part by the number of
Ethernet and serial ports available. In any case, an NV9000 system includes:
• A system controller
• Control panels or GUIs
• Routers
The system controller software fields commands (button presses) at the control panels, interprets
them, issues instructions to all the routers in the network, obtains status from the routers, and relays
the status back to the control panels as visual feedback for the operator.

Configuration Database
The NV9000 control system uses a standard, SQL-compliant, off-the-shelf database management
system in which to create configuration databases. System administrators may develop their own
tools to import and export data. The NV915 control system is similar.
Both the NV9000 and NV915 are configured using NV9000-SE Utilities.

Lock, Protect, and Release

In a router control system, both source and destination devices can be locked or protected. Lock
and protect options include:
• Locks and protects made in the system controller.
• Locks and protects made in the router.
• Locks and protects disabled.
In a router control system, the default setting for each of the destination lock and destination protect
configuration settings is “in the system controller.” The default setting for each of the source lock
and source protect configuration settings is “None.”
NV9000 locks and protects can apply to sources and destinations connected to compact routers.
However, operators cannot perform locks or protects at a CR Series remote panel.
You must configure the compact router locks as “in system.” The NV9000 does not recognize any
locks made locally.
CR Series control panels do not show status for locks made in the NV9000 system. NV96xx panels
do show the status of locks made in the NV9000 system.

142 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System

NV915
The NV915 Router Control System is a 1RU unit (9″ deep) dedicated to control system functions
only. It provides a subset of the features of the NV9000 at less cost. Its features include:
• Two Ethernet ports, one for routers and panels, and the other for configuration.
• No serial ports.
• Flash-based storage.
• Support for up to 32 NV96xx control panels.
• Support for up to 4 of Miranda’s NVISION series routers.

Compact Routers in an NV9000 System

Installing one or more Compact Routers on an NV9000 network requires Ethernet connections, a
system configuration generated by NV9000-SE Utilities and uploaded to the NV9000 system con-
troller, and one or more control panels, either NV96xx panels or CR Series remote panels.
Figure 8-1 shows a typical NV9000 router control system as it applies to Compact Routers:
Video
Reference
E’net GUI

Video Router (House Network)

(Router & Panel
Network)
•••

Automation NV9000
E’net
Audio Router System
Switch
Controller
•••

Port Router
Panels
Compact Routers
NV9000-SE
Configuration Utilities
Database
Figure 8-1. NV9000 Router Control System Schema

The choice of routers and number of routers, of course, depends on your requirements. An NV96xx
control panel is not strictly required, but strongly recommended.
S You must use CRSC to perform the initial setup of routers and remote panels for an NV9000
network.

Network Connection
Use CAT5 Ethernet cable and follow these simple steps:
1 Connect your Ethernet switch to the “Router and Panel Network” port of the NV9000 host
computer.
2 Connect each router to the Ethernet switch.
You must assign a unique IP address to each router and designate at least one physical level
(partition) for each router.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 143

8. Misc. Topics
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System

3 Connect your remote panel(s) to the Ethernet switch.

You must either assign a unique IP address to each remote panel or specify that the panel is to
be identified by DHCP.
Refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide or its on-line help for detailed information.
Following are important points about compact routers in an NV9000 system.

Configuration Differences
Under an NV9000 or NV915 control system, the compact routers and remote panels are slightly
different:
• Level sets.
NV9000-SE Utilities uses level sets to define virtual levels and physical levels. Under CRSC or
in standalone situations, compact routers do not have the concept of a level set or virtual level.
Under CRSC, the idea of physical levels is informal.
NV9000-SE Utilities uses “devices” sets to define inputs and outputs. CRSC defines inputs and
outputs in its panel configurations.
In stand-alone systems, inputs and outputs are not “defined” at all, but simply connected.
• DHCP.
Under NV9000, panels may be identified by DHCP. The NV9000 does this at startup. A CRSC
network does not have DHCP. Stand-alone configurations not using CRSC rely on the rotary
switch positions to designation IP addresses and levels.
• Locks and Protects.
Under NV9000, remote panels have no locks or protects. Under CRSC, remote panels may
have destination locks (and panel locks). In standalone configurations, panels may have desti-
nation locks (and panel locks).

Operational Differences
Under an NV9000 or NV915 control system, a compact router system differs slightly from other
systems:
• Takes
Under NV9000, takes are very simple and all-level. Press Dst, press Src. Possibly just Src if the
remote panel is configured with a default destination only.
Under CRSC, takes are complex, involving button colors, level selection and ordering of level
selection, destination locks, and so forth.
• Other panels and other routers.
Your NV9000 system might have NV96xx panels and other routers in addition to CR Series
equipment. Certain other panels have features not available to CR Series remote panels. For
example, the NV9601 supports the selection of devices by category and suffix (or category and
index). Most NV96xx panels support locks, protects, and force release. CR Series panels do not
have these features.
With other routers, the number of sources and destinations you can control can far exceed the
number of devices connected to CR Series routers.

144 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System

• Locks
Under NV9000, remote panels cannot perform locks or unlocks. Other panels might however
lock, protect, or release sources and destinations connected to compact routers.
Under CRSC, remote panels can lock and unlock destinations, but not sources.
• Asynchronous notification
Under automation, CR Series products support the asynchronous notification feature of
Miranda’s NVISION serial protocol.

AES Routers
Under an NV9000 or NV915 control system, AES compact routers perform stereo switching only,
regardless of how they are configured.
S Note that, during configuration, the AES inputs and outputs must be numbered as if they were
paired mono channels. See Devices on page 139 for configuration information.

Loss of Reference
Let N be the nominal size of the router, 16 or 32.
If an AES router transitions from synchronous mode to asynchronous, it re-writes the 2N×2N
matrix as an N×N matrix and the 2N×2N route table is lost. That is one of the reasons for the
15-minute delay before such a transition.
When the AES router re-writes the matrix, it attempts to preserve as much of the 2N×2N informa-
tion as possible. Thus,
• If an output pair has a “left” signal from input N in its “left” channel, the output pair becomes
N-left, N-right.
• If an output pair has a “left” signal from input N in its “right” channel, the output pair becomes
N-left, N-right.
• If an output pair has no “left” signal at all, the router chooses the input number (N) from its out-
put’s “left” channel, and the output pair becomes N-left, N-right.
This method has been described as “right follows left.”
S This behavior would be important to engineers only when loss of reference occurs. It has no
bearing on normal operation.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 145

8. Misc. Topics
Cabling

Cabling
Analog Audio Routers
Miranda offers a breakout cable for DB25 connectors of analog audio routers. The part number is
WC0053.
Each DB25 connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs):
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

For 16×16 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and 25–32, respec-
tively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs (and outputs) are treated as 16 ste-
reo pairs.
For 32×32 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–
48, 49–56, and 57–64, respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs (and
outputs) are treated as 32 stereo pairs.
For 32×4 routers, the connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56,
and 57–64, respectively. The inputs and outputs are labelled accordingly. The inputs are treated as
32 stereo pairs. The single output connector provides outputs 1–8 (4 stereo pairs). The inputs and
outputs are labelled accordingly.

Machine Control Routers

Many VTRs and other devices provide a DE9 connector for machine control. The machine control
routers have RJ-45 connectors. Customers will need RJ45-to-DE9 cables (or some other means of
connecting to DE9 ports.
This is the RJ-45 to DE9 mapping for RS-422:
RJ-45 DE9
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9

This cable wiring is applicable whether the port is a controlling port or controlled port.

146 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
Ordering Information

Ordering Information
These are the 1RU CR Series components:
CRPS1 12V power supply, 4-pin Molex connector, with cord, and cord retention strap.
CR1616-3Gig 16×16 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR1616-HD 16×16 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1616-HD-NR 16×16 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1616-SD 16×16 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1616-SD-NR 16×16 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1616-AES 16×16 AES Digital Audio Router.
CR1616-AV 16×16 Analog Video Router.
CR1616-AA 16×16 Analog Audio Router.
CR1604-3Gig 16×4 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR1604-HD 16×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1604-HD-NR 16×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1604-SD 16×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1604-SD-NR 16×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1604-AV 16×4 Analog Video Router.
CR1604-AA 16×4 Analog Audio Router.
CR1602-3Gig-CQX 16×2 “3Gig” Clean and Quiet Digital Video Router.
CR1602-HD-CQX 16×2 High-Definition Clean and Quiet Digital Video Router.
CR1602-SD-CQX 16×2 Standard-Definition Clean and Quiet Digital Video Router.
CR0808-3Gig 8×8 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR0808-HD 8×8 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR0808-HD-NR 8×8 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR0808-SD 8×8 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR0808-SD-NR 8×8 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR0808-AV 8×8 Analog Video Router.
CR0808-AA 8×8 Analog Audio Router.
CR16-PR 16-Port Machine Control Router.
CP1602-CQX 16×2 Clean and Quiet Control Panel.
CP1616 16×16 Control Panel.
CP1604 16×4 Control Panel.
CP1602 16×2 Control Panel.
CP0808 8×8 Control Panel.
CP3201 32×1 Control Panel. (This is a 1RU panel!)
RP16 16×16 Remote Panel Module (requires a control panel to function).

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 147

8. Misc. Topics
Ordering Information

These are the 2RU CR Series components:

CR3204-3Gig 32×4 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR3204-HD 32×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR3204-HD-NR 32×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3204-SD 32×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router
CR3204-SD-NR 32×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3204-AES 32×4 AES Digital Audio Router
CR3204-AV 32×4 Analog Video Router
CR3204-AA 32×4 Analog Audio Router
CR3232-3Gig 32×32 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR3232-HD 32×32 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR3232-HD-NR 32×32 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3232-SD 32×32 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR3232-SD-NR 32×32 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3232-AES 32×32 AES Digital Audio Router.
CR3232-AV 32×32 Analog Video Router.
CR3232-AA 32×32 Analog Audio Router.
CR32-PR 32-Port Machine Control Router.
CP3204 32×4 Control Panel.
CP3232 32×32 Control Panel.
RP32 32×32 Remote Panel Module (requires a control panel to function).

These are other associated components:

SB0033-xx CR Series software and documentation CD.
SV0679-xx CRConfig (software).
SV0904-01 CRSC (Compact Router System Configurator installer).
IG0002-00 Button legend template (Word document).
IG0003-00 Button legend template (Illustrator document).
IG0004-00 Button legend template (Freehand document).
WC0053-xx DB25 breakout cable.

148 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 8. Misc. Topics
Power Cord Retention

Power Cord Retention

Use the supplied retention strap to keep the AC power cord firmly connected to the power supply.
Follow these steps to use the strap:
1 Firmly insert the AC power cord into the power supply. Examine the last figure in this section
to see how the strap should be applied.
2 Placed the Velcro retention strap, fuzzy side up, on top of the power supply with the buckle loop
approximately 1 inch from the AC input side and the remaining strap around the cord end and
down:

3 Holding the buckle in place, lift the strap up and around the cord end so the strap overlaps itself:

4 Holding the buckle loop in place, route the strap around the back of the supply diagonally
across so that it sticks out on the left below the output cord:

5 Continue the strap around toward the buckle loop and through the loop. Cinch the strap tightly.
While keeping tension, place the 2 inch strap end (with Velcro loops) down on the fuzzy part to
complete the process:

6 Examine the strap though its path around the cord and power supply. Be sure that no slack
exists and that it is tight the full length of the strap. If necessary, adjust and cinch it more tightly.

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 149

8. Misc. Topics
Power Cord Retention

150 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

Index

0–9 32×4 router

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
16×16 control panel 3Gig video
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 60, 69
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 routers . . . . . . . 3–4, 10, 20, 25–26, 97, 100–103,
16×16 remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118–120
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 3Gig video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 8×8 router
16×16 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–9 A
16×2 control panel
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Acrobat usage
16×2 CQX router bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
16×4 control panel Add level (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Address
16×4 router IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44–46, 48–50, 143–144
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20–21 mailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
1RU control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31–32 shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
1RU remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Address, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
1RU router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 AES
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2RU control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Audio Engineering Society . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2RU remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 mono switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 134, 145
2RU router router . . . . . . . . . 13–14, 20, 25–26, 30, 147–148
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 stereo switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
32×32 control panel AES routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 100–103, 118–120
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 AES/EBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 AES3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
32×32 remote panel module AES3id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 133
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Analog
32×32 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 audio router . . . . . 3–4, 15, 20, 23, 27–28, 30, 41,
front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 . . 93, 100, 105–107, 118, 123–124, 146–148
rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–9 audio router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
32×4 control panel audio router, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
audio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 151

Index

video router . . . . . . . 3–4, 13, 21–22, 26–27, 91, illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 82

. . . . . . . . . . 100, 104, 118, 121–122, 147–148 initial states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
video router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 60, 69
video specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18, 30, 72–73, 78, 82
Analog audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Buttons, level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Analog video
routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Analog video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102–103 C
Assembly
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Cable
RP16 and CP1616, front and top views . . . . . 114 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 143
RP32 and CP3232, front and top views . . . . .130 length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 69
Asynchronous AES routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–14 video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Audio Capital or bold-face letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Captive panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 CD, software and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
router, AES . . . . . . . . 3–4, 30, 100–103, 118–120 CE declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
router, analog . . . . . . 3–4, 15, 20, 23, 27–28, 30, Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
41, 93, 100, 105–107, 118, 123–124, 146–148 Chapters
router, digital . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 13–14, 26, 30, 91, 1, Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .100–101, 118–120, 147–148 2, Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
specifications, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 3, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
specifications, digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 4, Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 5, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Automation connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 6, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Automation, third-party systems . . . . . .5, 20, 38, 94 7, Technical details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8, Misc. Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Compact router . . . . . 2, 7, 20, 37–39, 43–45, 47–48,
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 94, 143
benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Block diagram features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AES router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Compact router system configurator . . . . . . . . . . 5, 7
analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
analog video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142–143
CQX digital video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
digital audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Connectors
digital video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 20, 40–41, 60, 68, 133
BNC connectors . . . . . . . . .7, 20, 40–41, 60, 68, 133 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Bold-face or capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 DB25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 28, 41, 146
Bookmarks, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 DE9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 146
Breakaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 input, output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 68
Breakout cable, WC0053 . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 146, 148 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34, 40, 71, 74, 81
Button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Button legend template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Contact information
Button legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Button mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Control panel . . . . . . . 2–5, 10–11, 13–15, 17–18, 20,
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 82 . . . . . . . . . 30–34, 37, 39–40, 60, 68, 77, 85,
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 17–18, 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 130, 147–148
destination . . . . . . .17–18, 30, 72–74, 78, 81–83 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 30 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

152 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 Index

initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 CR0808-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147

NV96xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 39, 143 CR0808-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 106, 147
Control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 CR0808-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 39, 71, 79 CR0808-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 14, 38–39, 142–145 CR0808-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
NV915 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 38–39, 142–145 CR0808-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
Controlled port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 29, 41, 73, 146 CR0808-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
Controlling port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 29, 41, 73, 146 CR0808-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
Controlling v. controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 CR1602-3Gig-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 147
Copyright notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii CR1602-HD-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 147
CP0808 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 110, 147 CR1602-SD-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 147
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 CR1604-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 147
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 CR1604-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 107, 147
CP1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4, 17, 31, 147 CR1604-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 CR1604-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 147
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 CR1604-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
CP1602-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 117, 147 CR1604-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
front view, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 CR1604-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
CP1604 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4, 17, 31, 147 CR1604-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 CR1616-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33 CR1616-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 105, 147
CP1616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4, 17, 31–32, 109, 147 CR1616-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 CR1616-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 104, 147
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31–32 CR1616-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
front view, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 CR1616-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 CR1616-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100, 147
CP3201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 CR1616-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 100
CP3204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 18, 33, 148 CR16-PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 100, 108, 147
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 CR3204-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CP3232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 18, 33, 126–127, 148 CR3204-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 124, 148
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 CR3204-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 CR3204-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 122, 148
front view, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 CR3204-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 CR3204-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 CR3204-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX control panel CR3204-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 CR3232-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX Digital video CR3232-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 123, 148
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 CR3232-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX digital video CR3232-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 121, 148
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 CR3232-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX Digital video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 CR3232-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX panel (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 CR3232-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
CQX router CR3232-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 148
front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CR32-PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 118, 125
rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CRConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 43–44, 76, 148
top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
CQX video Creating a router network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CRPS1 (power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 147
CR series . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3, 5–7, 14, 20, 37, 39, 59, CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 41, 44–45, 48, 53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 94, 142, 147–148 CRSC network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 CRSC networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 153

Index

D CP1616, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

CP1616, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31–32
Data reverse (mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 CP1616, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Data reverse mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 CP3204, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Database, configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142–143 CP3232, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
DB25 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 CP3232, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DB25 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 41, 146 CP3232, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DE9 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 146 CQX panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Declaration of conformance (CE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii CQX router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Default remote panel module state . . . . . . . . . . . .131 CQX router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Default router state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 CQX router, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 CR0808-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Design considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 CR1604-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Destination (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 CR1616-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Destination buttons . . .17–18, 30, 72–74, 78, 81–83 CR1616-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Destination lock . . . . . .18, 30, 72–74, 77–78, 82–83 CR16-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Destination locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 CR3204-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Device (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 CR3204-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 CR3232-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 CR3232-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
router 3–4, 13–14, 26, 30, 91, 100–101, 118–120 CR32-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 RP16 and CP1616 assembly, front and
Digital audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 RP16, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
router 3–4, 10–11, 21, 26, 91, 100–101, 118–120 RP16, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 RP16, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Digital video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 RP16, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Document RP32 and CP3232 assembly, front and
part number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii RP32, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Dolby Digital 5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 RP32, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Drawings RP32, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, AES router, rear view 101 RP32, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
16×4 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 RP32, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
16×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1RU router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 100 Dynamic port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1RU router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . .21–25, 27–28
1RU router, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21–23
2RU router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 118 E
2RU router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26–27, 29
2RU router, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 28 EC9700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
32×32 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 EC9710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
32×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8×8 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8×8 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CP0808, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Email address
CP0808, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 tech support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
CP1602, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Enable NV9000 mode (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CP1602, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CP1604, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11, 97
CP1604, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33 ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

154 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 Index

Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 34 8×8 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 143 block diagram, AES router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 143–144 block diagram, analog audio router . . . . . . . . 15
Ethernet switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43–44, 48 block diagram, analog video router . . . . . . . . 13
European Broadcasting Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 block diagram, CQX digital video router . . . . 11
Examples, symbol for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 block diagram, digital audio router . . . . . . . . . 13
block diagram, digital video router . . . . . . . . . 10
block diagram, machine control router . . . . . . 15
F CP0808, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CP0808, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 93 CP1602, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
FCC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii CP1602, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Features CP1602-CQX, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . 17
16×16 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 CP1604, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16×16 remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 CP1604, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . 31, 33
16×16 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 CP1616, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
16×2 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 CP1616, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . 31–32
16×4 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 CP1616, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
16×4 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20–21 CP1616, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1RU router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 CP3204, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2RU router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 CP3232, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
32×32 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 CP3232, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
32×4 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 CP3232, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
32×4 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 CP3232, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8×8 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 CQX control panel (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
compact router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 CQX panel (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 CQX router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . 115
CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 CQX router, rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . 115
remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 CQX router, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figures CR0808-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, AES router, rear view 101 CR1604-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16×16 control panel (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 CR1616-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
16×16 remote panel module (photo) . . . . . . . .19 CR1616-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
16×16 router, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . .8 CR16-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
16×16 router, rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . .8–9 CR3204-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
16×2 CQX router, front view (photo) . . . . . . .12 CR3204-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16×2 CQX router, rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . .9 CR3232-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
16×4 router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . .21 CR3232-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
16×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 CR32-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
1RU router, front view (drawing) . . . . . .20, 100 RP16 and CP1616 assembly, front and
1RU router, rear view (drawing) . .21–25, 27–28 top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1RU router, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . .21–23 RP16, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2RU router, front view (drawing) . . . . . .25, 118 RP16, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2RU router, rear view (drawing) . . . . .26–27, 29 RP16, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2RU router, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . .26, 28 RP16, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
32×32 control panel (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 RP32 and CP3232 assembly, front and
32×32 remote panel module (photo) . . . . . . . .19 top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
32×32 router, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . .8 RP32, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
32×32 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 RP32, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
32×32 router, rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . .8–9 RP32, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
32×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 RP32, rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8×8 router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . .22 RP32, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 155

Index

Find, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 K
First Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Formats, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Knurled screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 34
FPGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 74, 81
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 30, 73
L
Last Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G LED, power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34, 85
Legends, button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 60, 69
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Level buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Go to Next View, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Level selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Go to Previous View, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Level, physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Grounding terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 34, 40 Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44–46, 48–49, 64
GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 37 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72–73, 76, 82, 142
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 destination . . . . . . . 18, 30, 72–74, 77–78, 82–83
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 30, 73, 77, 82
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
H destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Loss of reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HD routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 10, 20, 25–26, 97, Low tally . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 18, 30, 72–73, 77, 82, 134
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–103, 118–120
HD sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 90
HD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 M
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 60, 69
routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Machine control router . . . . 4, 15, 20, 24, 29–30, 41,
High tally . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 18, 30, 73, 78, 82, 133 . . . . . . . . . . 72, 76, 100, 108, 118, 125, 146
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Machine control router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
How to Machine control routers . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 147–148
install the router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Machine control takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76
perform a take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Mailing address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Hyperlinks, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
preventive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 74, 81, 131
I button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
initial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Initial control panel state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 RJ45 to DE9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 146
Initial I/O mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Mask, subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 68 Memory, non-volatile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 20, 34
equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11 Miranda
Inputs, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 email, tech support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 mailing address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
design considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 main number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 sales number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
receiving and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 shipping address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
stand-alone router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 94
Installing a compact router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 website address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Installing CRConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Misc. Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Mode, data reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IP address . . . . . . . . . . .44–46, 48–50, 134, 143–144 Modules, remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 147–148

156 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 Index

Mono AES switching . . . . . . . . . . . .13–14, 134, 145 Panel, captive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Multi-level take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Panel, control . . . . . . . . . 2–5, 10–11, 13–15, 17–18,
. . . . . . . . . 20, 29–34, 37, 39–40, 60, 68, 77,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 114, 130, 147–148
N NV96xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39, 143
Panel, remote . . . . . . 2–5, 19, 34–35, 37, 39, 43–45,
Network . . . . . . . . . . . 47–48, 77, 112–114, 128–130
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 34 Panels, control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 43, 45, 75–76 Part number, document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Network address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Network, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 135 PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Networks, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46–47 PDF documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Next Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Non-reclocking router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4, 10 Photos
Non-reclocking routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 118 16×16 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Non-volatile memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 20, 34 16×16 remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 90, 98 16×16 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
NV compact router Ethernet (protocol) . . . . . . . . .63 16×16 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
NV9000 . . . .5–6, 18, 39, 41, 47–48, 59, 71, 79, 142 16×2 CQX router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
router control system . . . . . . .6, 38–39, 142–145 16×2 CQX router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
router control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 32×32 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 39, 143 32×32 remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NV9000 network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 135 32×32 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
NV9000 networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46–47 32×32 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
NV9000-SE Utilities . . . . . . . . .5, 37, 131, 137, 143 CP1602-CQX front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NV915 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 39, 48, 59, 71, 143 CP1616 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 CP3232 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
router control system . . . . . . .6, 38–39, 142–145 CQX control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NV96xx control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 39, 143 power cord retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Physical level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Physical specifications
O analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
analog video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 digital audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 digital video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 68 Pinout, RJ-45 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 134 Port (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Overview, CR series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Port connectors, RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Port pinout, RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Port router
P see machine control router
Port routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Port, controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 29, 41, 73, 146
PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 90, 98 Port, controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 29, 41, 73, 146
Panel button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Port, dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Panel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Port, RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 29, 41
Panel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Ports, router and panel network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Panel IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Power connectors . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34, 40, 71, 74, 81
Panel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 30, 73, 77, 82, 134 Power cord retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 149

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 157

Index

Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 1RU, rear view, drawing . . . . . . . . 21–25, 27–28

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 1RU, top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21–23
Power supply 37, 59, 68, 71, 74, 81, 85–86, 147, 149 2RU, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
choose 1 or 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 68 2RU, rear view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 26–27, 29
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 34, 85 2RU, top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71–72, 74, 81 32×32, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 32×4, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
about PDF documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3Gig video . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 10, 20, 25–26, 97,
chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–103, 115, 118–120
terms, conventions and abbreviations . . . . . . . .2 8×8, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 8×8, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Previous Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 13–14, 20, 25–26, 30,
Primary level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–103, 118–120
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 analog audio . . . . . . . 3–4, 15, 20, 23, 27–28, 30,
PS1, PS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 71, 74, 81 . . . 41, 93, 100, 105–107, 118, 123–124, 146
analog video . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 13, 21–22, 26–27,
. . . . . . . . . . 91, 100, 102–104, 118, 121–122
R assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
asynchronous, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
Rack mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
Rate, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 CQX digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 115–116
Receiving and unpacking shipments . . . . . . . . . . .37 CR0808-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 97, 134 CR1604-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 34, 71, 74, 81, 85 CR1616-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Reference CR1616-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 CR16-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Reference video . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11, 13, 15, 20, 40, CR3204-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59–60, 67, 69, 86, 98 CR3204-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 CR3232-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 CR3232-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 CR32-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Remote panel module . . . . . . 2–5, 19, 34–35, 37, 39, digital audio . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 13–14, 26, 30, 91,
. . . . . 43–45, 47–48, 77, 112–114, 128–130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–101, 118–120
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 digital video . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 10–11, 21, 26, 91,
Remote panel module (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–101, 118–120
Remote panel modules . . . . . . . .5, 62, 134, 147–148 HD . . 3–4, 10, 20, 25–26, 97, 100–103, 118–120
Return Material Authorization (RMA) . . . . . . . . . iii HD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Revision input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii inputs, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40–41, 146 machine control . . . . . . . 4, 15, 20, 24, 29–30, 41,
RJ-45 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 29, 41 . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 76, 100, 108, 118, 125, 146
RJ45-to-DE9 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 146 network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii network operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34
Rotary switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 34, 39, 46, 60, 68 non-reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 10
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 7, 37 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
16×16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
16×16, 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, rear view . . . . .101 SD . . 3–4, 10, 20, 25–26, 97, 100–103, 118–120
16×4, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 SD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
16×4, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 31 synchronous, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
1RU, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Router and panel network, port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

158 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10

 Index

Router control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 39, 71, 79 NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 143

NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 38–39, 41, 142–145 Setup NV9000 remote panel (page) . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NV915 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 38–39, 142–145 Shipping address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Router control systems, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Router network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 45, 75–76 SMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4 Software and documentation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3Gig video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 Source (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
analog audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 Source buttons . . . . . . . . . . 17–18, 30, 72–73, 78, 82
analog video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 Special messages, symbol for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CQX digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Specifications
digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 analog audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 analog video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147–148 digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Routers, audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Routers, machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Routers, stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 67 physical, analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Routers, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 physical, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Routing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 81 physical, machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . 92
RP16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 4, 19, 34, 112–114, 147–148 physical, remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 physical, router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 video reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
RP32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 4, 19, 35, 128–130 Stand-alone network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56, 74
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Stand-alone router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 53, 71, 80
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Stand-alone routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 67
rear view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 74, 81
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
RS-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 24, 29, 34, 41, 94, 146 Stereo AES switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 94 Strap, power cord retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 149
Subnet address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44–45, 47–48
Subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
S SWB (super wide band) . . . . . . . . . . 10, 38, 97, 134
Switch, Ethernet . . . . . . . . . 43–44, 48, 74, 143–144
Sales number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Switch, rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34, 39, 46, 60, 68
Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Switching
SB0033 (installation disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 145
Screws, knurled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 34 mono, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
SD routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 25–26, 100, 118 stereo, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Symbols
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 60, 69 for examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 for special messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SD video router . . . . 3–4, 10, 97, 101–103, 118–120 Sync, reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Search, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Synchronous AES router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14
Server

CR Series Compact Router • User’s Guide 159

Index

T U
Tables UniConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
analog audio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Update remote panel (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
analog video specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Use DHCP (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
digital audio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 User’s guide, chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
digital video specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
physical specifications, analog audio router . .92 V
physical specifications, control panel . . . . . . .93
physical specifications, machine control router 92 Velcro strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 149
physical specifications, remote panel module .93 Version, software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
physical specifications, router . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Video
power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 analog specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
power specifications, power supply . . . . . . . . .90 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
video reference specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 digital specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 76, 134 reference . . . . . . . . 10–11, 13, 15, 20, 40, 59–60,
machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69, 86, 98
multi-level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 reference, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133–134 reference, termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
high . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 30, 73, 78, 82 router, 3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 10, 20, 25–26, 97,
high or ow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–103, 115, 118–120, 134
low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 18, 30, 72–73, 77, 82 router, analog . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 13, 21–22, 26–27,
Technical details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 . . 91, 100, 102–104, 118, 121–122, 147–148
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii, 94 router, CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 115–116, 147
Telephone number router, digital . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 10–11, 21, 26, 91,
main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100–101, 118–120, 147–148
sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii router, HD . 3–4, 10, 97, 100–103, 115, 118–120
technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii router, SD . 3–4, 10, 97, 100–103, 115, 118–120
Temperature, operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Template, button legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 supported rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Termination Video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
video reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Virtual levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Terms, conventions and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . .2
Testing your installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Third-party automation systems . . . . . . .5, 20, 38, 94 W
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 WC0053 breakout cable . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 146, 148
Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Website, Miranda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43–44, 48

160 Rev 2.3 • 05 Nov 10